advertisement
Dell 3333dn and 3335dn Laser
MFP
User's Guide
November 2009 www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Trademarks
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Reproduction of this material in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the
DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to the entities claiming the marks and names of their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Contents
Safety information...........................................................................15
Learning about the printer.............................................................17
Additional printer setup..................................................................29
Contents
2
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact.....................69
Loading paper and specialty media.............................................75
Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................87
Software overview..........................................................................93
Contents
3
Contents
4
Contents
5
Contents
6
Scanning to an FTP address.........................................................147
Scanning to a computer or flash drive......................................152
Contents
7
Understanding printer menus.....................................................156
Contents
8
Maintaining the printer.................................................................227
Administrative support.................................................................238
Clearing jams...................................................................................240
Contents
9
Troubleshooting.............................................................................254
Contents
10
Contents
11
Contents
12
Contents
13
14
Safety information
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: See the enclosed Safety Sheet before making any cable or electrical connection.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
Use care when you replace a lithium battery.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to move it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
•
Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
•
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•
Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
Safety information
15
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
Safety information
16
Learning about the printer
Thank you for choosing this printer!
We've worked hard to make sure it will meet your needs.
To start using your new printer right away, use the setup materials that came with the printer, and then skim the
User’s Guide to learn how to perform basic tasks. To get the most out of your printer, read the User’s Guide carefully, and make sure you check the latest updates on our Web site.
We're committed to delivering performance and value with our printers, and we want to make sure you're satisfied.
If you do encounter any problems along the way, one of our knowledgeable support representatives will be delighted to help you get back on track fast. And if you find something we could do better, please let us know. After all, you are the reason we do what we do, and your suggestions help us do it better.
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?
Initial setup instructions:
•
Connecting the printer
•
Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•
Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•
Loading paper
•
Performing printing, copying, scanning, and faxing tasks, depending on your printer model
•
Configuring printer settings
•
Viewing and printing documents and photos
•
Setting up and using printer software
•
Setting up and configuring the printer on a network, depending on your printer model
•
Caring for and maintaining the printer
•
Troubleshooting and solving problems
Help using the printer software
Find it here
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came with the printer.
User's Guide—The User's Guide is available on the
Software and Documentation CD.
Quick Reference—The Quick Reference is available on the
Software and Documentation CD under “View Additional
Documentation.”
For updates, check our Web site at support.dell.com.
Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program or application, and then click Help.
Click to view context-sensitive information.
Notes:
•
The Help installs automatically with the printer software.
•
The printer software is located in the printer
Program folder or on the desktop, depending on your operating system.
Learning about the printer
17
What are you looking for?
The latest supplemental information, updates, and technical support:
•
Documentation
•
Driver downloads
•
Product upgrades
•
Service call and repair information
•
Order status
•
Live chat support
•
E-mail support
•
Telephone support
Find it here
Dell Support Web site—support.dell.com
Note: Select your region, and then select your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your region or country can be found on the Support Web site.
Have the following information ready when you contact support so that they may serve you faster:
•
Service Tag
•
Express Service Code
Note: The Service Tag and Express Service Code appear on labels located on your printer.
•
Software and Drivers—Certified drivers for my printer and installers for Dell printer software
•
Readme files—Last-minute technical changes, or advanced technical reference material for experienced users or technicians
Software and Documentation CD
•
•
Supplies and accessories for my printer
Replacement cartridges
Dell Printer Supplies Web site–dell.com/supplies
You can purchase printer supplies online, by telephone, or in select retail stores.
Product Information Guide
•
Safety information for preparing to operate my printer
•
Regulatory information
•
Warranty information
Note: The Product Information Guide may not be available in your country or region.
Printer configurations
Note: Printer configuration may vary depending on your printer model.
Learning about the printer
18
Basic model
1
Front door release button
2
Printer control panel
3
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
4
Standard exit bin with overhead light
5
Paper stop
6
Standard 250-sheet tray
7
Multipurpose feeder door
8
Front door
Learning about the printer
19
1
System board locks
2
Locking device
3
Ethernet port
4
USB port
Note: Use this USB port to connect the printer to the computer.
5
Fax wall connection port
Note: The Fax ports are present only when a fax card is installed.
6
Fax telephone connection port
Note: The Fax ports are present only when a fax card is installed.
7
Rear door
8
Power switch
9
Printer power cord socket
10
USB peripheral port
11
Removable protective plate
Note: The protective plate is removed when internal options are installed.
Selecting a location for the printer
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•
Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard.
•
Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
Learning about the printer
20
•
Keep the printer:
–
Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
–
Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
–
Clean, dry, and free of dust
•
Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
1
Top 254 mm (10 in.)
2
Right Side 203 mm (8 in.)
3
Rear
4
Front
305 mm (12 in.)
203 mm (8 in.)
5
Left Side 76 mm (3 in.)
Basic functions of the scanner
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:
•
Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.
•
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
•
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
•
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
•
Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).
Note: The fax function is available on selected printer models only.
Learning about the printer
21
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
The ADF can scan multiple pages, including duplex pages. If duplex settings are selected, the ADF scans both sides of the page automatically. When using the ADF:
•
Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
•
Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
•
Scan sizes from 125 x 127 mm (4.92 x 5.0 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
•
Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
•
Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m
2
(14 to 32 lb).
•
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:
•
Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
•
Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
•
Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
•
Copy books up to 25.3-mm (1-in.) thick.
Learning about the printer
22
Understanding the printer control panel
Item
1
Display
2
Keypad
Description
View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages.
Enter numbers or symbols on the display.
3
Dial Pause
4
Back
•
Press to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To field, a
Dial Pause is represented by a comma (,).
•
From the home screen, press to redial a fax number.
•
The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside of the
Fax menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing causes an error beep.
In the Copy menu, press to delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count. The default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing numerous times.
In the Fax Destination List, press to delete the right-most digit of a number entered manually.
You can also press to delete an entire shortcut entry. Once an entire line is deleted, another press of causes the cursor to move up one line.
In the E-mail Destination List, press to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the character is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.
Learning about the printer
23
Item
5
Home
Description
Press to return to the home screen.
6
Start
•
Press to initiate the current job indicated on the display.
•
From the home screen, press to start a copy job with the default settings.
•
If pressed while a job is scanning, the button has no effect.
7
Indicator light
8
Stop
Indicates the printer status:
•
Off—The power is off.
•
Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
•
Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
•
Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.
Stops all printer activity
A list of options is offered once Stopped appears on the display.
Understanding the home screen
After the printer is turned on and a short warm-up period occurs, the display shows a basic screen which is referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.
Note: Buttons appearing on the home screen may vary depending on home screen customization settings.
Display item
1
Copy
2
3
Menus
Description
Opens the Copy menus
Note: From the home screen, you can also access the Copy menus by pressing a number on the keypad.
Opens the E-mail menus
Opens the menus. These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
Learning about the printer
24
Display item
4
FTP
5
Status message bar
Description
Opens the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus
•
Shows the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•
Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low.
•
Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what you should do so the printer can continue processing, such as Close door.
6
Status/Supplies
7
Tips
8
Fax
Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring intervention. Touch it to access the messages screen for more information on the message, including how to clear it.
All menus have a Tips button. Tips is a context-sensitive Help feature within the display touch screens.
Opens the Fax menus
Other buttons may appear on the home screen, such as:
Display item
Release Held Faxes
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
Lock Device
Unlock Device
Description
If this button is shown, then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set. To access the list of held faxes, touch this button.
Searches on any of the following items and returns search results:
•
User names for held or confidential print jobs
•
Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
•
Profile names
•
Bookmark container or job names
•
USB container or job names for supported extensions only
Opens a screen containing all the held jobs
This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and Device Lockout
Personal Identification Number (PIN) has been set.
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct PIN locks the printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).
This button appears on the screen when the printer is locked. The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while it appears.
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct PIN unlocks the printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Depending on your options and administrative setup, your screens and buttons may vary from those shown.
Learning about the printer
25
Sample touch screen
Button
Home
Function
Returns to the home screen
Down arrow Opens an options screen
Left scroll decrease Scrolls to another value in decreasing order
Right scroll increase Scrolls to another value in increasing order
Left arrow Scrolls left
Right arrow Scrolls right
Learning about the printer
26
Button
Back
Function
Navigates back to the previous screen
Other touch-screen buttons
Button
Submit
Function
Saves a value as the new default setting
Down arrow
Up arrow
Unselected radio button
Selected radio button
Cancel Jobs
Moves down to the next screen
Moves up to the next screen
This is an unselected radio button. The radio button is gray to show it is unselected.
This is a selected radio button. The radio button is blue to show it is selected.
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings: Print,
Fax, and Network.
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:
•
Print job
•
Copy job
•
Fax
•
FTP
•
E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen. Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access information about the job. If more than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Learning about the printer
27
Button
Continue
Cancel
Select
Function
Touch this button to accept a selection or to clear messages, and then proceed with the job.
•
Cancels an action or a selection
•
Cancels out of a screen and returns to the previous screen
Opens the next related menu or menu item
Features
Feature
Menu trail line:
Menusª Settingsª Copy Settingsª
Number of Copies
Attendance message alert
Description
A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature acts as a trail, showing the path taken to arrive at the current menu. It gives the exact location within the menus.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item.
The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default setting.
If an attendance message occurs which affects a function, such as copy or fax, then a solid red exclamation point appears over the function button on the home screen, and the red indicator light blinks.
Learning about the printer
28
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.
Available internal options
•
Memory cards
•
Firmware cards
•
Printer hard disk
•
Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
All of these options may not be available. For more information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Additional printer setup
29
Accessing the system board to install internal options
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1
Loosen the screws on the back of the system board a quarter turn.
Additional printer setup
30
2
Lift the front of the scanner unit to open the system board.
3
Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1
Flash memory or firmware card connectors
2
Fax card connector
3
Printer hard disk connector
4
Memory card connector
Additional printer setup
31
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board. To install the memory card:
1
Access the system board.
2
Unpack the memory card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3
Open the memory card connector latches.
Additional printer setup
32
4
Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges in the connector.
1
Notches
2
Ridges
5
Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place.
Note: After the memory card is installed, make sure the memory card connector latches return to the latched vertical position and are secure against the card.
6
Release the system board access latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
7
Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if it is moved.
Additional printer setup
33
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed, but the connectors are interchangeable.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1
Access the system board.
2
Unpack the card.
Note: Avoid touching any electrical components on the card.
Additional printer setup
34
3
Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.
1
Plastic pins
2
Metal pins
4
Push the card firmly into place.
Notes:
•
The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
•
Be careful not to damage the connectors.
5
Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
Additional printer setup
35
6
Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if it is moved.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1
Access the system board.
2
Unpack the ISP and plastic tee.
Note: Avoid touching the components on the hard disk.
Additional printer setup
36
3
Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Note: If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must first be removed. To remove the hard disk:
a
Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out.
Additional printer setup
37
b
Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
c
Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.
Additional printer setup
38
d
Remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and then remove the bracket. Set the printer hard disk aside.
4
Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
Additional printer setup
39
5
Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes in the system board, and then press downward until the tee snaps into place. Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely, and that the tee is seated firmly onto the system board.
6
Install the ISP onto the plastic tee. Angle the ISP over the plastic tee, and then approach the plastic tee so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage.
7
Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee.
Additional printer setup
40
8
Insert the long thumbscrew, into the hole closest to the white connector, and turn it clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place. Do not tighten the thumbscrew at this time.
9
Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage.
10
Tighten the long thumbscrew.
Note: Do not overtighten the thumbscrew.
11
Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
Additional printer setup
41
12
If a printer hard disk was previously installed, then attach the printer hard disk to the ISP. For more information,
see “Installing a printer hard disk” on page 43.
13
Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
14
Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if it is moved.
Additional printer setup
42
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1
Access the system board.
2
Unpack the printer hard disk.
Note: Avoid touching the components on the hard disk.
3
Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
Additional printer setup
43
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
a
Using a flathead screwdriver to loosen the screws, remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and then remove the bracket.
b
Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the ISP, and then press downward on the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.
c
Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
Additional printer setup
44
To install a printer hard disk directly onto the system board:
a
Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the system board, and then press downward on the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.
Additional printer setup
45
b
Attach the two provided screws to secure the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
c
Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
4
Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
Additional printer setup
46
5
Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if it is moved.
Installing a fax card
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1
Access the system board.
2
Unpack the fax card.
Additional printer setup
47
3
Remove the metal cover from the fax card opening.
4
Insert the fax card, and then tighten the two screws to secure the fax card mounting bracket.
Additional printer setup
48
5
Insert the plug of the fax card interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
6
Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.
7
Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if it is moved.
Additional printer setup
49
Installing hardware options
Installing a 550-sheet drawer
The printer supports one optional drawer; you can install a 550-sheet drawer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1
Unpack the drawer, and then remove any packing material from the outside of the drawer.
2
Remove the tray from the support unit.
1
Support unit
2
Tray
3
Remove any packing material and tape from inside the tray.
4
Insert the tray into the support unit.
5
Place the drawer in the location chosen for the printer.
Additional printer setup
50
6
Align the printer with the drawer, and then lower the printer into place.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Be sure to match the following:
•
The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•
The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Additional printer setup
51
1
USB port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
2
Ethernet port
Verifying printer setup
•
Print a menu settings page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option and install it again.
•
Print a network setup page to verify that your printer is correctly connected to the network. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.
Note: If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet, then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings. Once you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings as user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, choose another value,
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
Additional printer setup
52
3
Touch Reports.
4
Touch Menu Settings Page.
The menu settings page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Reports.
4
Touch Network Setup Page.
The network setup page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.
5
Check the first section on the network setup page, and confirm that Status is “Connected.”
If Status is “Not Connected,” the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Setting up the printer software
Installing printer software
A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer. The printer software is typically installed during the initial printer setup. If you need to install the software after setup, follow these instructions:
For Windows users
1
Close all open software programs.
2
Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3
From the main installation dialog, click Install Printer and Software.
4
Follow the instructions on the screen.
For Macintosh users
1
Close all open software applications.
2
Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3
From the Finder desktop, double-click the printer CD icon that automatically appears.
4
Double-click the Install Printer and Software icon.
5
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Additional printer setup
53
Using the World Wide Web
Updated printer software may be available on the Dell Support Web site at support.dell.com.
Updating available options in the printer driver
Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs.
For Windows users
1
Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2
In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
3
Press Enter, or click OK.
The printer folder opens.
4
Select the printer.
5
Right-click the printer, and then select Properties.
6
Click the Install Options tab.
7
Under Available Options, add any installed hardware options.
8
Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2
Click Print & Fax.
3
Select the printer, and then click Options & Supplies.
4
Click Driver, and then add any installed hardware options.
5
Click OK.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1
From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
2
Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3
Select the printer, and then from the Printers menu, choose Show Info.
4
From the pop-up menu, choose Installable Options.
5
Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.
Additional printer setup
54
Setting up wireless printing
Follow these steps to set up your printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: See the enclosed Safety Sheet before making any cable or electrical connection.
Note: Do not connect cables until instructed to do so.
1
Set up the printer hardware. For more information, see the Setup Guide.
2
Follow the instructions for your operating system:
•
Windows—See “Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network” on page 55 and
“Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)” on page 56.
•
Macintosh—See “Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network” on page 55 and
“Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)” on page 59.
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network
Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
•
SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•
Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.
•
Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.
•
Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:
–
WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key.
or
–
WPA or WPA2 passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.
Additional printer setup
55
–
No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the Advanced method, then you may need the following:
•
Authentication type
•
Inner authentication type
•
802.1X username and password
•
Certificates
Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:
•
An optional wireless card is installed in your printer.
•
Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
•
The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
1
Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer on.
Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.
Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the screen.
2
From the printer control panel, select your language and country or region, and then touch Continue.
Additional printer setup
56
3
Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
4
Deselect any function you plan to set up later, such as Fax or E-mail, and then touch Continue.
5
Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.
6
If Fax is enabled, then type in your Fax Station name and touch Enter. For more information on fax station name and number, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect Fax.
7
If Fax is enabled, enter the Fax station (phone) number for this printer, and then touch Continue.
8
If E-mail is enabled, type in the Primary SMTP (mail server) Gateway address, and then touch Enter. For more information on enabling e-mail, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect
E-mail.
9
If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.
10
Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
11
Click Install Printer and Software.
12
Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.
13
Select Suggested, and then click Next.
14
Click Wireless Network Attach.
Additional printer setup
57
15
Remove the label covering the USB port on the back of the printer.
16
Connect the cables in the following order:
a
Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly.
b
If you plan to set up fax now, then connect the fax cables. See the User's Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD for help on deciding how to connect the cables.
17
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the software installation.
Note: Basic is the recommended path to choose. Choose Advanced only if you want to customize your installation or if your network uses 802.1x security.
18
To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer, follow steps 10 through 14 for each computer.
Additional printer setup
58
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:
•
An optional wireless card is installed in your printer.
•
Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
•
The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
Prepare to configure the printer
1
Locate the printer MAC address on the sheet that came with the printer. Write the last six digits of the MAC address in the space provided:
MAC address: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
2
Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer on.
3
From the printer control panel, select your language and country or region, and then touch Continue.
4
Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
5
Deselect any function you plan to set up later, such as Fax or E-mail, and then touch Continue.
Additional printer setup
59
6
Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.
7
If Fax is enabled, type in your Fax Station name, and then touch Enter. For more information on fax station name and number, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect Fax.
8
If Fax is enabled, enter the Fax station (phone) number for this printer, and then touch Continue.
9
If E-mail is enabled, type in the Primary SMTP (mail server) Gateway address, and then touch Enter. For more information on enabling e-mail, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect
E-mail.
10
If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.
Enter the printer information
1
Access the AirPort options.
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later a
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b
Click Network.
c
Click AirPort.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier a
From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.
b
From the Applications folder, double-click Internet Connect.
c
From the toolbar, click AirPort.
2
From the Network pop-up menu, select print server xxxxxx, where the x’s are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet.
3
Open the Safari browser.
4
From the Bookmarks drop-down menu, select Show.
5
Under Collections, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double-click the printer name.
Note: The application is referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.3, but is now called Bonjour by Apple
Computer.
6
From the main page of the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the page where the wireless settings information is stored.
Additional printer setup
60
Configure the printer for wireless access
1
Type the name of your network (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2
Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router.
3
Select the type of security you use to protect your wireless network.
4
Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network.
5
Click Submit.
6
Open the AirPort application on your computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later a
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b
Click Network.
c
Click AirPort.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier a
From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.
b
From the Applications folder, double-click Internet Connect.
c
From the toolbar, click AirPort.
7
From the Network pop-up menu, select your wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print to a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
1
Install a PPD file on the computer:
a
Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
b
Double-click the installer package for the printer.
c
From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
d
Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
e
Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement.
f
Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
g
From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
h
Type the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary software is installed on the computer.
i
Click Restart when installation is complete.
2
Add the printer:
a
For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2
Click Print & Fax.
Additional printer setup
61
3
Click +.
4
Select the printer from the list.
5
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1
From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.
2
Double-click the Utilities folder.
3
Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
4
From the Printer List, choose Add.
5
Select the printer from the list.
6
Click Add.
b
For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2
Click Print & Fax.
3
Click +.
4
Click AppleTalk.
5
Select the printer from the list.
6
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1
From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.
2
Double-click the Utilities folder.
3
Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
4
From the Printer List, choose Add.
5
Choose the Default Browser tab.
6
Click More Printers.
7
From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
8
From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
9
Select the printer from the list.
10
Click Add.
Installing the printer on a wired network
Use the following instructions to install the printer on a wired network. These instructions apply to Ethernet connection.
Before you install the printer on a wired network, make sure that:
•
You have completed the initial setup of the printer.
•
The printer is connected to your network with the appropriate type of cable.
For Windows users
1
Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.
Additional printer setup
62
If the CD does not launch after a minute, then do the following:
a
Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b
In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
2
Click Install Printer and Software.
3
Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.
4
Select Suggested, and then click Next.
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, using IPv6, or to configure printers using scripts, select
Custom and follow the on-screen instructions.
5
Select Wired Network Attach, and then click Next.
6
Select the printer manufacturer from the list.
7
Select the printer model from the list, and then click Next.
8
Select the printer from the list of printers discovered on the network, and then click Finish.
Note: If your configured printer does not appear in the list of discovered printers, click Add Port and follow the on-screen instructions.
9
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
For Macintosh users
1
Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2
3
Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
4
Install the drivers and add the printer.
a
Install a PPD file on the computer:
1
Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
2
Double-click the installer package for the printer.
3
From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
4
Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
5
Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement.
6
Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
7
From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
8
Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary software is installed on the computer.
9
Click Restart when installation is complete.
b
Add the printer:
•
For IP printing:
Additional printer setup
63
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2
Click Print & Fax.
3
Click +.
4
Click IP.
5
Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
6
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1
From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
2
Double-click Utilities.
3
Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
4
From the Printer List, click Add.
5
Click IP.
6
Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
7
Click Add.
•
For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2
Click Print & Fax.
3
Click +.
4
Click AppleTalk.
5
Select the printer from the list.
6
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1
From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
2
Double-click Utilities.
3
Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
4
From the Printer List, click Add.
5
Choose the Default Browser tab.
6
Click More Printers.
7
From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
8
From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
9
Select the printer from the list.
10
Click Add.
Note: If the printer doesn't appear in the list, you may need to add it using the IP address. Contact your system support person for assistance.
Additional printer setup
64
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new network Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer is assigned a new IP address.
The printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address in order to print to it over the network.
Notes:
•
If the printer has a static IP address that will stay the same, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
•
If the computers are configured to print to the printer by a network name that will stay the same, instead of by
IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
•
If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection, disconnect the wired connection, turn the printer off, and then turn the printer back on again. This will enable the wireless
ISP.
•
Only one network connection at a time is active. If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless, you must first turn the printer off, connect the cable (to switch to a wired connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on again.
For Windows users
1
Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.
2
Click , or click Start and then click Run.
3
In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
4
Press Enter, or click OK.
The printer folder opens.
5
Locate the printer that has changed.
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
6
Right-click the printer.
7
Click Properties.
8
Click the Ports tab.
9
Locate the port in the list, and then select it.
10
Click Configure Port.
11
Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field. You can find the new IP address on the network setup page you printed in step 1.
12
Click OK, and then click Close.
Additional printer setup
65
For Macintosh users
1
Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.
2
Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3
Add the printer:
•
For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later a
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b
Click Print & Fax.
c
Click +.
d
Click IP.
e
Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
f
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier a
From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b
Double-click Utilities.
c
Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
d
From the Printer List, click Add.
e
Click IP.
f
Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
g
Click Add.
•
For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b
Click Print & Fax.
c
Click +.
d
Click AppleTalk.
e
Select the printer from the list.
f
Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier a
From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b
Double-click Utilities.
c
Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
d
From the Printer List, click Add.
e
Choose the Default Browser tab.
f
Click More Printers.
g
From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
h
From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
Additional printer setup
66
i
Select the printer from the list.
j
Click Add.
Setting up serial printing
In serial printing, data is transferred one bit at a time. Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing, it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available.
After installing the serial port or communication (COM) port, you will need to configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate. Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1
Set the parameters in the printer:
a
From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu with port settings.
b
Locate the submenu with serial port settings.
c
Make any necessary changes to the serial settings.
d
Save the new settings.
e
Print a menu settings page.
2
Install the printer driver:
a
Insert the Software and Documentation CD. It launches automatically.
If the CD does not launch automatically, then do the following:
1
Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2
In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
b
Click Install Printer and Software.
c
Click Agree to accept the Printer Software License Agreement.
d
Click Custom.
e
Make sure Select Components is selected, and then click Next.
f
Select the printer model from the menu, and then click Add Printer.
g
Click the + beside the printer model under Select Components.
h
Make sure the correct COM port is available under Select Components. This is the port where the serial cable attaches to the computer (example: COM1).
i
Make sure the box next to the selected printer model is checked.
j
Select any other optional software you want to install, and then click Next.
k
Click Finish to complete the printer software installation.
3
Set the COM port parameters:
After the printer driver is installed, you must set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
The serial parameters in the COM port must match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
a
Open the Device Manager.
1
Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2
In the Start Search or Run box, type devmgmt.msc.
Additional printer setup
67
3
Press Enter, or click OK.
The Device Manager opens.
b
Click + to expand the list of available ports.
c
Select the communications port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
d
Click Properties.
e
On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer.
Look for the printer settings under the serial heading on the Menu Settings page you printed earlier.
f
Click OK, and then close all the windows.
g
Print a test page to verify printer installation. When a test page prints successfully, printer setup is complete.
Additional printer setup
68
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
Saving paper and toner
Using recycled paper and other office papers
•
Low moisture content (4–5%)
•
Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.
•
Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
•
Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m
2
[16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions).
Conserving supplies
There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing, copying, or receiving faxes. You can:
Use both sides of the paper
You can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper for a printed document, a copy, or an incoming fax. For more information, see:
•
“Printing on both sides of the paper (duplexing)” on page 95
•
“Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)” on page 107
•
“Printing an incoming fax on both sides of the paper (duplexing)” on page 142
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper from the Print dialog.
To copy two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper, see
“Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet” on page 110.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
69
Choose scanning
You can avoid making a paper output of a document or photograph by scanning it and then saving it to a computer program, application, or flash drive. For more information, see:
•
“Sending an e-mail using the touch screen” on page 119
•
“Scanning to a computer” on page 152
•
“Scanning to a flash drive” on page 153
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
•
Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Saving energy
Using Eco-Mode
Use Eco-Mode to quickly select one or more ways to reduce your printer's environmental impact.
Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select an Eco-Mode setting.
Choose
Energy
To
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
•
Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.
•
The printer enters Power Saver mode after one minute of inactivity.
•
When the printer enters Power Saver mode, the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights are turned off.
•
The scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started.
Paper
•
Enable the automatic duplex feature
•
Turn off print log features.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.
Off Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco-Mode. This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer.
To select an Eco-Mode setting:
1
On the home screen, touch .
2
Touch Settings.
3
Touch General Settings.
4
Touch Eco-Mode.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
70
5
Touch the arrows to select a setting.
6
Touch Submit.
Submitting changes appears.
Adjusting Power Saver
To save energy, you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Power Saver mode.
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings, and then click General Settings.
3
Click Timeouts.
4
In the Power Saver box, type in the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Power Saver mode.
5
Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Settings.
4
Touch General Settings.
5
Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears.
6
Touch Timeouts.
7
Touch the arrows next to Power Saver Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Power Saver mode.
8
Touch Submit.
9
Touch .
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
71
Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you are having trouble reading your display, you can adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100 . The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings, and then click General Settings.
3
In the Screen Brightness box, type in the brightness percentage you want for your home screen.
4
Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Settings.
4
Touch General Settings.
5
Touch the down arrow until Screen Brightness appears.
6
Touch the arrows to select a setting.
7
Touch Submit.
8
Touch .
Setting the standard exit bin light
To save energy, you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin.
Available settings are Off, Dim, and Bright.
The factory default setting for Normal/Standby Mode is Bright.
The factory default setting for Power Saver is Dim.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings, and then click General Settings.
3
Click Output Lighting.
4
From the Normal/Standby Mode list, select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in Ready or Standby mode.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
72
5
From the Power Saver list, select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in Power Saver mode.
Note: For more information on Power Saver mode, see “Adjusting Power Saver” on page 71.
6
Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Settings, and then touch General Settings.
4
Touch the down arrow until Output Lighting appears.
5
Touch Output Lighting.
6
Touch the arrow button next to Normal/Standby Mode to select the light settings the standard exit bin will use when in Ready or Standby mode.
7
Touch the arrow button next to Power Saver to select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in
Power Saver mode.
Note: For more information on Power Saver mode, see “Adjusting Power Saver” on page 71.
8
Touch Submit.
9
Touch .
Reducing printer noise
Use Quiet Mode to reduce the printer noise.
Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select a Quiet Mode setting.
Choose
On
Off
To
Reduce printer noise.
•
You may notice a reduction in processing speed.
•
Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.
•
Fans run at a reduced speed or are turned off.
Use factory default settings. This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer.
To select a Quiet Mode setting:
1
On the home screen, touch .
2
Touch Settings.
3
Touch General Settings.
4
Touch Quiet Mode.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
73
5
Touch the arrows to select a setting.
6
Touch Submit.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
74
Loading paper and specialty media
This section explains how to load the trays and feeders. It also includes information about paper orientation, setting the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type
The Paper Size setting for the standard 250 tray and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper size menu. The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Paper Menu.
4
Touch Paper Size/Type.
5
Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears.
6
Touch Submit.
7
Touch to return to the home screen.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:
•
Units of measure (millimeters or inches)
•
Portrait Width
•
Portrait Height
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
Specify a unit of measurement
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Paper Menu.
4
Touch the down arrow until Universal Setup appears, and then touch Universal Setup.
5
Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired unit of measure.
6
Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
7
Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired width or height.
Loading paper and specialty media
75
8
Touch Submit to save your selection.
Submitting Selection appears, followed by the Paper menu.
9
Touch to return to the home screen.
Avoiding jams
The following hints can help you avoid jams:
Paper tray recommendations
•
Make sure the paper lies flat in the paper tray.
•
Do not remove the paper tray while the printer is printing.
•
Do not load the paper tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
•
Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
•
Make sure the guides in the paper tray or the manual feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes.
•
Push the paper tray in firmly after loading paper.
Paper recommendations
•
Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
•
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
•
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
•
Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
•
Store paper per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Loading trays
1
Pull the tray completely out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media
76
2
Squeeze and slide the guides to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
For long paper like A4 or legal, squeeze and slide the length guide backwards to accommodate the length of paper you are loading.
Loading paper and specialty media
77
If you are loading A6-size paper:
a
Squeeze and slide the length guide toward the center of the tray to the A5 size position.
b
Raise the A6 backstop.
Notes:
•
The standard tray accommodates only 150 sheets of A6-size paper. Notice the maximum fill line on the A6 backstop which indicates the maximum height for loading A6-size paper. Do not try to overload the tray.
•
A6-size paper cannot be loaded in the optional tray.
Note: Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.
3
Flex a stack of paper back and forth to loosen the sheets, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4
Load the paper stack toward the back of the tray as shown with the recommended print side facedown.
Note: The maximum fill line on the width guide indicates the maximum height for loading paper. Do not load
A6-size paper to the maximum fill line; the tray holds only 150 sheets of A6-size paper.
Loading paper and specialty media
78
1
Maximum fill line
Load letterhead with the top edge of the sheet toward the front of the tray and the design facedown.
5
Squeeze and slide the guides to lightly touch the side of the stack.
Loading paper and specialty media
79
6
Insert the tray.
7
If the paper type you loaded differs from the type that was previously loaded in the tray, then change the Paper
Size/Type setting on the Paper menu.
Using the multipurpose feeder
Opening the multipurpose feeder
1
Grasp the handle, and pull the multipurpose feeder door down.
Loading paper and specialty media
80
2
Grasp the raised handle, and pull the extension forward.
3
Grasp the handle, and pull the extension so it flips forward.
4
Guide the extension down gently so the multipurpose feeder is extended fully and open.
Loading paper and specialty media
81
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1
Squeeze the tab located on the right width guide, and move the guides out fully.
2
Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
•
Flex sheets of paper or paper labels back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper or labels. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
•
Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the print side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
Loading paper and specialty media
82
•
Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Fanning prevents the edges of envelopes from sticking together. It also helps them feed properly to avoid jams. Do not fold or crease envelopes.
3
Load the paper or specialty media.
Notes:
•
Do not force any paper into the multipurpose feeder. Overfilling may cause jams.
•
Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or specialty media under the stack height limiters which are located on the guides.
•
Load paper, transparencies, and card stock with the recommended print side faceup and the top edge entering the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging the transparencies came in.
Loading paper and specialty media
83
•
Load letterhead with the logo faceup and the top edge entering the printer first.
•
Load envelopes with the flap side down and the stamp location in the position shown. The stamp and address are shown to illustrate the proper orientation for loading envelopes.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
4
Squeeze the tab located on the right width guide to adjust the guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
Loading paper and specialty media
84
5
Slide the paper gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop. Paper should lie flat in the multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder and is not bent or wrinkled.
6
From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking trays
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.
The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder. The printer can sense A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, Executive, and Universal paper sizes. The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: To link the multipurpose feeder, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu item.
The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Unlinking trays
Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray.
To unlink a tray, change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray:
•
Paper Type (for example: Plain Paper, Letterhead, Custom Type <x>)
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type <x>, or define your own custom name.
•
Paper Size (for example: letter, A4, statement)
Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray automatically. Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in the tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Paper may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.
Loading paper and specialty media
85
Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray.
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
From the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Paper Menu.
4
Touch Paper Size/Type.
5
Select the tray number or MP Feeder Type.
6
Touch the left or right arrow until Custom Type <x> or another custom name appears.
7
Touch Submit.
Changing a Custom Type <x> name
If the printer is on a network, you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type <x> for each of the custom paper types that are loaded. When a Custom Type <x> name is changed, the menus display the new name instead of Custom Type <x>.
To change a Custom Type <x> name:
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the address in the
TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Paper Menu.
4
Click Custom Name.
5
Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name <x> box.
Note: This custom name will replace a custom type <x> name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus.
6
Click Submit.
7
Click Custom Types.
Custom Types appears, followed by your custom name.
8
Select a Paper Type setting from the pick list next to your custom name.
9
Click Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media
86
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60–176 g/m
60 g/m
2
2
(16–47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than
(16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m
2
(20 lb bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m 2 (24 lb) or heavier paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m
2
(16–47 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For paper heavier than 176 g/m
2
, grain short is recommended.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
87
Fiber content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
•
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
•
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm
(±0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
•
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
•
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
•
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb)
•
Multiple-part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:
•
Always use new, undamaged paper.
•
Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
•
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•
Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
•
Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
•
Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m
2
weight paper.
•
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•
Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
88
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•
For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60%.
•
Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Paper size Dimensions Standard
250- sheet tray
Optional 550sheet tray
Multi- purpose feeder
Duplex unit
Automatic
Document feeder
A4
A5
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
X X
A6
1
JIS B5
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
X
X
X
X
X
Letter
Legal
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
X X
1
A6 is supported only for grain long papers.
2
Universal paper settings” on page 75.
3
To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 210 mm (8.267 in) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in); Universal length must be between 279.4 mm (11 in) and 355.6 mm (14 in).
Paper and specialty media guidelines
89
Paper size
Oficio
Folio
Statement
Universal
2, 3
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
9 Envelope
Dimensions
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
138 x 210 mm
(5.5 x 8.3 in.) up to 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
70 x 127 mm
(2.8 x 5 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
X
Standard
250- sheet tray
148 x 182 mm
(5.8 x 7.7 in.) up to 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X
X
Optional 550sheet tray
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Multi- purpose feeder
Duplex unit
X
X
X
X
Automatic
Document feeder
X
X
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9.1 in.)
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm
(3.99 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X X X X
1
A6 is supported only for grain long papers.
2
Universal paper settings” on page 75.
3
To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 210 mm (8.267 in) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in); Universal length must be between 279.4 mm (11 in) and 355.6 mm (14 in).
Paper and specialty media guidelines
90
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine and the duplex path support 60–90 g/m 2 (16–24 lb) paper weights. The multipurpose feeder supports 60–163 g/m
2
(16–43 lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Duplex unit Paper type
Plain Paper
Card stock
Transparencies
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Envelopes
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored paper
Light paper
Heavy paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type <x>
(where x represents 1–
6)
X
X
X
X
Standard 250-sheet tray
Optional 550-sheet tray
Multi-purpose feeder
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Paper capacities
The capacities of the trays and the multipurpose feeder are based on 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper.
Load up to
Tray 1
250 sheets of paper
150 sheets of A6-size paper
50 paper labels
50 transparencies
Notes
Note: Vinyl, pharmacy, or dual-sided labels are not supported. Use paper labels only. Single-sided paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use. It is recommended to print no more than 20 pages of paper labels per month.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
91
Load up to
Tray 2
550 sheets of paper
50 paper labels
Multipurpose feeder
50 sheets of paper
15 paper labels
10 transparencies
10 sheets of card stock
7 envelopes
Notes
Note: Only one optional drawer may be installed on the printer at a time. The maximum amount of paper that can be loaded depends on whether you have an optional 550-sheet tray.
Note: Feed paper into the multipurpose feeder only to the point where its leading edge can contact the paper guides. Do not force the paper into the feeder.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
92
Software overview
Use the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer to install a combination of software applications, depending on your operating system.
Note: If you purchased your printer and computer separately, you must use the Software and Documentation CD to install these software applications.
Note: These software applications are not available with Macintosh ®
.
Status Monitor Center
Note: For the local Status Monitor Center to work properly, bidirectional communication support must be in place so the printer and computer can communicate. The Status Monitor Center works when the printer is connected to a network or to a computer locally through a USB cable.
Use the Status Monitor Center to manage multiple Status Monitors.
•
Double-click a printer name to open its Status Monitor, or select Run to open a Status Monitor for a particular printer.
•
Select Update to change the appearance of the list of printers.
Driver Profiler
Use the Driver Profiler to create driver profiles that contain custom driver settings. A driver profile can contain a group of saved printer driver settings and other data for such things as:
•
Print orientation and N-Up (document settings)
•
Installation status of an output tray (printer options)
•
User-defined paper sizes (custom papers)
•
Simple text and watermarks
•
Overlay references
•
Font references
•
Form associations
Dell Printer Alert Utility
Note: This application is not available with Windows 2000 or earlier.
The Dell Printer Alert Utility informs you when there are errors requiring your intervention on your printer. When there is an error, a bubble appears telling you what the error is, and points you to the appropriate recovery information.
Note: For the Dell Printer Alert Utility to work properly, bidirectional communication support must be in place so the printer and computer can communicate. An exception is added to the Windows Firewall to allow this communication.
If you opted to install the Dell Printer Alert Utility with your printer software, the utility automatically launches when the software installation is completed. The utility is active if you see in the System Tray.
Software overview
93
To disable the Dell Printer Alert Utility:
1
From the System Tray, right click the icon.
2
Select Exit.
To re-enable the Dell Printer Alert Utility:
1
In Windows Vista or later:
a
Click ª Programs.
b
Click Dell Printers.
c
Click Dell 3333dn and 3335dn Laser MFP.
In Windows XP:
Click Startª Programs or All Programsª Dell Printersª Dell 3333dn and 3335dn Laser MFP.
2
Click Printer Alert Utility.
Software overview
94
Printing
Printing a document
1
Load paper into a tray or feeder.
2
From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
3
Do one of the following:
For Windows users
a
With a document open, click File ª Print.
b
Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup, and then adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific size or type of paper, adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.
c
Click OK, and then click Print.
For Macintosh users
a
Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:
1
With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2
Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3
Click OK.
b
Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2
From the Print dialog and pop-up menus, adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3
Click Print.
Printing on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
In order to save paper, you can print a multiple-page document on both sides of the paper.
1
On the home screen, touch Menus, and then touch Settings.
2
Touch the down arrows until Print Settings appears.
3
Touch Print Settings.
4
Touch Finishing Menu.
5
Touch the Sides (Duplex) arrows until 2 sided appears.
Printing
95
6
Touch Submit.
Submitting changes appears.
7
Touch to return to the home screen.
Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
•
Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
•
Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•
Before loading letterhead, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
•
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:
–
–
“Using the multipurpose feeder” on page 80
Tips on using transparencies
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on transparencies:
•
Feed transparencies from a 250-sheet tray, a 550-sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
•
Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
•
Use transparencies that are 138–146 g/m 2 (37–39 lb. bond) in weight.
•
To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
•
Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on envelopes:
•
Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: Envelopes can be printed at a temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Envelope Weight is set to Heavy and
Envelope Texture is set to Rough. Select these settings using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer control panel Paper menu.
•
For the best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m
2
(24 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m
2
(28 lb bond) weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed
90 g/m 2 (24 lb bond) weight.
•
Use only new envelopes.
Printing
96
•
To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–
Have excessive curl or twist
–
Are stuck together or damaged in any way
–
Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
–
Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
–
Have an interlocking design
–
Have postage stamps attached
–
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
–
Have bent corners
–
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
•
Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
Note: This printer is intended for occasional paper label printing only.
•
Do not load labels together with paper or transparencies in the same source; mixing media can cause feeding problems.
•
From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Labels.
•
Do not use labels with slick backing material.
•
Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
•
Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
•
Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
•
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.
•
Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
•
If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and use a non-oozing adhesive.
•
Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single-ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on card stock:
•
Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.
•
Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
•
Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems.
Printing
97
•
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.
•
Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.
•
Use grain short card stock when possible.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Holding jobs in the printer
When sending a job to the printer, you can specify that you want the printer to hold the job in memory until you start the job from the printer control panel. All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called
held jobs.
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.
Job type
Confidential
Verify
Reserve
Repeat
Description
When you send a Confidential print job to the printer, you must create a PIN from the computer. The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0–9. The job is held in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel and choose to print or delete the job.
When you send a Verify print job, the printer prints one copy and holds the remaining copies in printer memory. Verify lets you examine the first copy to see if it is satisfactory before printing the remaining copies. Once all copies are printed, the job is automatically deleted from printer memory.
When you send a Reserve print job, the printer does not print the job immediately.
It stores the job in memory so you can print the job later. The job is held in memory until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu.
When you send a Repeat print job, the printer prints all requested copies of the job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later. You can print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory.
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
1
With a document open, click File ª Print.
2
Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3
Click Other Options, and then click Print and Hold.
4
Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
5
Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.
6
On the home screen, touch Held jobs.
Printing
98
7
Touch your user name.
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.
8
Touch Confidential Jobs.
9
Enter your PIN.
10
Touch Done.
11
Touch the job you want to print.
12
Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2
From the print options or Copies & Pages pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.
3
Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
4
Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.
5
On the home screen, touch Held jobs.
6
Touch your user name.
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.
7
Touch Confidential Jobs.
8
Enter your PIN.
9
Touch the job you want to print.
10
Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.
Printing
99
Printing from a flash drive
A USB port is located on the printer control panel. Insert a flash drive to print supported file types. Supported file types include: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, and .dcx.
Notes:
•
Hi-Speed flash drives must support the Full-speed standard. Flash drives supporting only USB Low-speed capabilities are not supported.
•
USB devices must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS (New Technology
File System) or any other file system are not supported.
•
If selecting an encrypted .pdf file, then enter the file password from the printer control panel.
•
Before printing an encrypted .pdf file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.
•
You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
To print from a flash drive:
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•
If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.
•
If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs, then Printer Busy appears. After the other jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
3
Touch the document you want to print.
Note: Folders found on the flash drive appear as folders. File names are appended by the extension type (for example, .jpg).
Printing
100
4
Touch the right arrow if you want to increase the number of printed copies.
5
Touch Print.
Note: Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print .pdf files from the flash drive as held jobs.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
To print samples of the fonts currently available for your printer:
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch Menus.
3
Touch Reports.
4
Touch the up or down arrow until Print Fonts appears, and then touch Print Fonts.
5
Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Reports.
4
Touch the down arrow until Print Directory appears.
5
Touch Print Directory.
Printing the print quality test pages
Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Hold down and while turning the printer on.
3
Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
4
Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears.
5
Touch Print Quality Pages Menu.
6
Touch Print Quality Pages.
Printing
101
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1
Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press on the keypad.
2
Touch the job you want to cancel.
3
Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Canceling a print job from the computer
To cancel a print job, do one of the following:
For Windows users
1
Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2
In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
3
Press Enter, or click OK.
The printer folder opens.
4
Double-click the printer icon.
5
Select the job to cancel.
6
From the keyboard, press Delete.
From the Windows taskbar:
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.
1
Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2
Select a job to cancel.
3
From the keyboard, press Delete.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later:
1
From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2
Click Print & Fax, and then double-click the printer icon.
3
From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
4
From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier:
1
From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2
Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3
Double-click the printer icon.
Printing
102
4
From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
5
From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
Printing
103
Copying
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
From the printer control panel, press .
4
If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying using the ADF
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
Adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
The copy screen appears.
4
Change the copy settings as needed.
5
Touch Copy It.
Copying
104
Copying using the scanner glass
1
Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2
On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
The copy screen appears.
3
Change the copy settings as needed.
4
Touch Copy It.
5
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
Next Page.
6
Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying photos
1
Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2
On the home screen, touch Copy.
3
Touch Options.
4
Touch Content.
5
Touch Photograph.
6
Touch Done.
7
Touch Copy It.
8
Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Making transparencies
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5
Touch Copy to, and then touch the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder and then place transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.
6
Touch the desired size of the transparencies, and then touch Continue.
7
Touch the up or down arrow until Transparency appears.
Copying
105
8
Touch Transparency, and then touch Continue.
9
Touch Copy It.
Copying to letterhead
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5
Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder and place letterhead facedown, top edge first in the multipurpose feeder.
6
Touch the desired size of the letterhead, and then touch Continue.
7
Touch the up or down arrow until Letterhead appears.
8
Touch Letterhead, and then touch Continue.
9
Touch Copy It.
Customizing copy settings
Copying from one size to another
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5
Touch Copy to, and then select the size you want the copy to be.
Note: If you select a paper size that is different from the “Copy from” size, then the printer will scale the size automatically.
6
Touch Copy It.
Copying
106
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
During the copy process, you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice. For example, if specialty media is located in the multipurpose feeder, and you want to make copies on that media:
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5
Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder or the tray that contains the paper type you want.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will need to also select the paper size and type.
6
Touch Copy It.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy.
For example, select 1-sided to 2-sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2-sided copies.
Note: The ADF automatically scans both sides of the page.
5
Touch Copy It.
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying to mixed paper sizes
The printer has two paper trays, one tray loaded with letter-size paper and the other with legal-size paper. A document that contains letter- and legal-size pages needs to be copied.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying
107
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Copy from, and then touch Auto Size Sense.
5
Touch Copy to, and then touch Auto Size Match.
6
Touch Copy It.
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying to a single paper size
The printer has one paper tray, loaded with letter-size paper. A document that contains letter- and legal-size pages needs to be copied.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Copy from, and then touch Mixed Letter/Legal.
5
Touch Copy to, and then touch Letter.
6
Touch Copy It.
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan and then scales the legal-size pages to print on letter-size paper.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5
Touch Copy It.
Copying
108
Adjusting copy quality
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Under Content, touch the left or right arrow to select what you are copying:
•
Text—Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art
•
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
•
Photograph—Used when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print
•
Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images
5
Touch Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off.
To turn collate off:
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
5
Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated.
6
Touch Copy It.
Copying
109
Placing separator sheets between copies
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Options.
5
Touch Separator Sheets.
Note: Collate must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is Off, the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.
6
Select one of the following:
•
Between Copies
•
Between Jobs
•
Between Pages
7
Touch Done.
8
Touch Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
•
The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B5 JIS.
•
The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Select a duplex setting.
5
Touch Options.
6
Touch Paper Saver.
7
Select the desired output.
8
Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies.
9
Touch Done.
10
Touch Copy It.
Copying
110
Creating a custom job (job build)
The custom job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
•
If you scan a document on the scanner glass, a set consists of one page.
•
If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
•
If you scan one page using the ADF, a set consists of one page.
For example:
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Options.
5
Touch Custom Job.
6
Touch On.
7
Touch Done.
8
Touch Copy It.
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
9
Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.
10
If you have another document to scan, load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Pausing the current print job to make copies
When the “Allow priority copies” setting is On, the printer pauses the current print job when you start a copy job.
Note: The “Allow priority copies” setting must be set to On in the Copy Settings menu so that you can pause the current print job and make copies.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying
111
3
From the printer control panel, press .
4
If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Options.
5
Touch Header/Footer.
6
Pick an area of the page to place the date and time.
7
Touch Date/Time, and then touch Continue.
8
Touch Done.
9
Touch Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, or Draft. To place a message on the copies:
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Copy.
4
Touch Options.
5
Touch Overlay.
6
Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use.
7
Touch Done.
8
Touch Copy It.
Copying
112
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel
Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed
1
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen, or press on the keypad.
2
Touch the job you want to cancel.
3
Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The remainder of the copy job is canceled. The home screen appears.
Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy. Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy from” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.
•
Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy to” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed.
•
If the size settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference.
•
If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, touch Manual Feeder, and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder.
•
When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the size of the original document. If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays, the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper.
Copying
113
Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can also be set for you automatically.
•
When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, setting the
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy.
•
Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
•
Hold your finger on the right arrow to make a continuous increment change.
•
Hold your finger on the left or right arrow two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.
•
Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
•
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
•
Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document.
•
Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images
Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies (simplex) from two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).
Options
Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver, Create Booklet, Advanced Imaging,
Custom Job, Separator Sheets, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Header/Footer, Overlay, Advanced Duplex, and Save as
Shortcut settings.
Copying
114
Paper Saver
This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.
Create Booklet
This option creates a stack of collated pages that, when folded, forms a booklet half the page size of the original document and with all the pages in order.
Note: To use Create Booklet, you must have a duplex unit attached to the printer.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Shadow
Detail, Scan Edge to Edge, and sharpness before you copy the document.
Custom Job
This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Separator Sheets
This option places a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, and print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
Margin Shift
This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance. This can be useful in providing space to bind or holepunch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
Edge Erase
This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the selected area, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.
Header/Footer
This option turns on the Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location.
Overlay
This option creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose between Urgent,
Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a button with an icon of that overlay will be available.
Copying
115
Advanced Duplex
This option controls whether the documents are one-sided or two-sided, what orientation your original documents have, and how your documents are bound.
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.
Save as Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut.
Improving copy quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
•
Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
•
Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that contain only text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
•
Use Text/Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics.
•
Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
When should I use Printed Image mode? Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper
When should I use Photograph mode?
Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
Copying
116
E-mailing
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Getting ready to e-mail
Enabling the e-mail function
The e-mail function must be enabled prior to use. If you disabled the e-mail function when setting up the printer for the first time, or if the printer has been off for an extended time, then follow these steps:
Note: To complete this step, you must know your Primary SMTP (mail server) Gateway address. For more information, see your system support person.
1
Touch Menus.
2
Touch Settings.
3
Touch General Settings.
4
Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setup to select Yes.
5
Touch Submit.
Submitting changes appears.
6
Turn off the printer, wait ten seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
7
From the printer control panel, select your language.
8
Select your country or region, and then touch Continue.
9
Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
10
Touch E-mail, and then touch Continue.
11
Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.
12
Touch Enter.
E-mailing
117
13
Touch Continue.
14
Type in the Primary SMTP Gateway address, and then touch Enter.
15
If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.
When the home screen appears, the e-mail function is enabled.
Setting up the e-mail function
For e-mail to operate, it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address.
To set up the e-mail function:
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4
Click E-mail Settings.
5
Click Setup E-mail Server.
6
Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
7
Click Add.
Configuring the e-mail settings
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4
Click E-mail Settings.
5
Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6
Click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
E-mailing
118
3
Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
4
Click E-mail Shortcut Setup.
5
Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
6
Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
7
Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
1
On the home screen, touch E-mail.
2
Type the recipient's e-mail address.
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
3
Touch Save as Shortcut.
4
Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Enter.
5
Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4
Enter the e-mail address or shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.
5
Touch E-mail It.
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
E-mailing
119
3
Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.
4
Touch E-mail It.
Sending an e-mail using the address book
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4
Touch Search Address Book.
5
Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.
6
Touch the name that you want to add to the To box.
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add; or search the address book.
7
Touch E-mail It.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4
Type an e-mail address.
5
Touch Options.
6
Touch Subject.
7
Type the e-mail subject.
8
Touch Done.
9
Touch Message.
10
Type an e-mail message.
11
Touch Done.
12
Touch E-mail It.
E-mailing
120
Changing the output file type
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4
Type an e-mail address.
5
Touch Options.
6
Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
•
PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
•
Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
•
TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent
JPEG.
•
JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
•
XPS—Creates a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
7
Touch E-mail It.
Note: If you selected Encrypted PDF, then enter your password twice.
E-mailing color documents
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4
Type an e-mail address.
5
Touch Options.
6
Touch Color.
7
Touch E-mail It.
Canceling an e-mail
•
When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
•
When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
E-mailing
121
Understanding e-mail options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.
•
Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e-mail screen appears with your new setting displayed.
•
When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed letter and legal paper sizes.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Binding
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
E-mail Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail. You can enter up to 255 characters.
E-mail File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
E-mail Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.
E-mailing
122
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
•
PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
•
Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
•
TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•
JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
•
XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your e-mail.
•
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
•
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
•
Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
•
Color—Sets the scan type and output for the e-mail. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e-mail address.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.
•
Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror
Image before you copy the document
•
Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
•
Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
•
Scan Preview—Displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
•
Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•
Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned e-mails will turn out
E-mailing
123
Faxing
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Getting the printer ready to fax
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start-up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:
Station Name
Station Number
1
When Station Name appears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
2
After entering the Station Name, touch Submit.
Faxing
124
3
When Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number.
4
After entering the Station Number, touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Fax Settings.
4
Click Analog Fax Setup.
5
Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
6
Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.
7
Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem. To determine the best way to set up the printer, see the following table.
Notes:
•
The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet. Other devices (such as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in the setup steps.
•
If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is required.
Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.
•
You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes.
Equipment and service options
Connect directly to the telephone line
Fax connection setup
See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on page 126
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated
Services Digital Network (ISDN) system
See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 127.
Use a Distinctive Ring service
Connect to a telephone line, telephone, and answering machine
Connect through an adapter used in your area
Connect to a computer with a modem
See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 127.
See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region” on page 130.
See “Connecting to a computer with a modem” on page 134.
Faxing
125
Connecting to an analog telephone line
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US-style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
Connecting to a DSL service
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.
3
Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.
Faxing
126
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.
Notes:
•
Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.
•
Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.
•
When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.
•
When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.
•
For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX system.
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern.
This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3
Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want the printer to answer:
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and triple ring patterns.
a
On the home screen, touch .
b
Touch Settings.
c
Touch Fax Settings.
d
Touch Analog Fax Settings.
e
Touch the down arrow until Distinctive Ring Settings appears
Faxing
127
f
Touch Distinctive Ring Settings.
g
Touch the arrow for the pattern setting you want to change.
h
Touch Submit.
Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack .
3
Remove the plug from the printer EXT port .
4
Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the printer EXT port .
Faxing
128
Use one of the following methods:
Answering machine
Answering machine and telephone
Faxing
129
Telephone or a telephone with an integrated answering machine
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack:
Country/region
•
Austria
•
Cyprus
•
Denmark
•
Finland
•
France
•
Germany
•
Ireland
•
Italy
•
New Zealand
•
Netherlands
•
Norway
•
Portugal
•
Sweden
•
Switzerland
•
United Kingdom
Countries or regions except Austria, Germany, and Switzerland
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
Note: There is a special RJ-11 plug installed in the printer EXT port . Do not remove this plug. It is necessary for the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones.
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your location.
Faxing
130
3
Connect the answering machine or telephone to the adapter.
Use one of the following methods:
Answering machine
Telephone
Faxing
131
Austria, Germany, and Switzerland
There is a special RJ-11 plug installed in the printer EXT port . Do not remove this plug. It is necessary for the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones.
Connecting to a telephone wall jack in Germany
Note: There is a special RJ-11 plug installed in the printer EXT port . Do not remove this plug. It is necessary for the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones.
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your location.
Faxing
132
3
Connect the adapter into the N slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.
4
If you would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication, then connect a second telephone line (not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.
5
If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, then connect a second telephone cable (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the active analog telephone wall jack.
Faxing
133
Connecting to a computer with a modem
Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.
1
Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2
Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3
Remove the protective plug from the printer EXT port .
4
Connect your telephone to the computer telephone jack.
Faxing
134
5
Connect an additional telephone cord (not provided) from the computer modem to the printer EXT port .
Enabling the fax function
The fax function must be enabled prior to use. If you disabled the fax function when setting up the printer for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, then follow these steps:
Note: Before completing these instructions, make sure the fax cables are connected. For more information, see
“Choosing a fax connection” on page 125.
1
Touch Menus.
2
Touch Settings.
3
Touch General Settings.
4
Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setup to select Yes.
5
Touch Submit.
Submitting changes appears.
6
Turn off the printer, connect the fax cables, and then turn the printer back on.
7
From the printer control panel, select your language.
8
Select your country or region, and then touch Continue.
9
Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
10
Touch Fax, and then touch Continue.
11
Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.
12
Enter the Fax Station Name, and then touch Enter.
13
Enter the Fax Station Number, and then touch Continue.
14
Touch Enter.
15
If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.
When the home screen appears, the fax function is enabled.
Faxing
135
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Fax Settings.
4
Click Analog Fax Setup.
5
Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
6
Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.
7
Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, you may have to reset the date and time.
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Security.
4
Click Set Date and Time.
5
Click inside the Set Date & Time box, and then enter the current date and time.
6
Click Submit.
Turning daylight saving time on or off
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time for certain time zones:
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Security.
4
Click Set Date and Time.
5
Select Automatically Observe DST.
6
Click Submit.
Faxing
136
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Fax.
4
Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press . The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to” box.
Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
5
Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk. This gives you the flexibility of faxing documents directly from software programs.
For Windows users
Notes:
•
In order to perform this function from your computer, you must use the PostScript printer driver for your printer.
•
Verify that the fax option is installed in the printer driver.
1
With a file open, click File ª Print.
2
Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3
Click the Other Options tab, and then click Fax.
4
On the Fax screen, type the name and number of the fax recipient.
5
Click OK, and then click OK again.
6
Click OK.
For Mac OS X version 10.2 and 10.3 users
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
2
From the print options pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.
3
Select Fax, and then enter the recipient name, number, and other information as needed.
4
Click Print.
Faxing
137
For Mac OS X version 10.4 or later users
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
2
From the PDF pop-up menu, choose Fax PDF.
3
Type the fax number in the To field, and enter other information as needed.
4
Click Fax.
If you receive an error, "No fax modems were found", follow these directions to add your printer as a fax:
a
From the Printer pop-up menu, choose Add Printer.
b
Select the printer from the dialog that appears.
c
From the Print Using pop-up menu, choose Select a driver to use.
d
From the list, choose your printer fax model, and then click Add.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web
Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.
4
Click Fax Shortcut Setup.
5
Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
6
Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7
Click Add.
Faxing
138
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Fax.
4
Enter the fax number.
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
5
Touch Save as Shortcut.
6
Enter a name for the shortcut.
7
Touch OK.
8
Touch Fax It to send the fax, or touch to return to the home screen.
Changing the fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web
Server
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.
4
Click Fax Shortcut Setup.
5
Select the list entry, and then update it using the text box.
6
Click Modify.
Faxing
139
Using shortcuts and the address book
Using fax shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut numbers when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the
Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number (1–99999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number, you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
Using the address book
Note: The address book feature is enabled if it contains at least one entry.
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Fax.
4
Touch Search Address Book.
5
Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.
6
Touch Search.
7
Touch the name to add it to the “Fax to” list.
8
Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses.
9
Touch Fax It.
Faxing
140
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax. Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra
Fine (slowest speed, best quality).
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Fax.
4
Use the keypad to enter the fax number.
5
Touch Options.
6
From the Resolution area, touch the left or right arrow to adjust the resolution to your preference.
7
Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Fax.
4
Use the keypad to enter the fax number.
5
Touch Options.
6
From the Darkness area, touch the left or right arrow to adjust the darkness of the fax.
7
Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch Fax.
4
Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad.
5
Touch Options.
6
Touch Advanced Options.
Faxing
141
7
Touch Delayed Send.
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue.
8
Touch the left or right arrow to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is unavailable.
9
Touch Done.
10
Touch Fax it.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Printing an incoming fax on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
In order to save paper, you can print all incoming faxes on both sides of the paper.
1
On the home screen, touch Menus.
2
Touch Settings, and then touch Fax Settings.
3
Touch Analog Fax Setup.
4
Touch Fax Receive Setting.
5
Touch the down arrow until Sides (Duplex) appears.
6
Touch the up or down arrow until Yes appears.
7
Touch Submit.
Viewing a fax log
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Reports.
3
Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Fax Settings.
4
Click Analog Fax Setup.
Faxing
142
5
Click the Block No Name Fax option.
This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
6
In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
•
When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
•
When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next
Page / Finish the Job appears.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1
On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2
Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the job you want to cancel.
3
Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Understanding fax options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.
•
Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The fax screen appears with your new setting displayed.
•
When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
•
When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.
Faxing
143
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photograph. Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your scan.
•
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
•
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
•
Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
•
Color—Sets the scan type and output for the fax. Color documents can be scanned and sent to a fax destination.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.
•
Standard—Suitable for most documents
•
Fine—Recommended for documents with small print
•
Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
•
Ultra fine—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Delayed Send, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job,
Transmission Log, Scan Preview, Edge Erase, and Advanced Duplex settings.
•
Delayed Send—Lets you send a fax at a later time or date. After setting up your fax, touch Delayed Send, enter the time and date you would like to send your fax, and then touch Done. This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on.
•
Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image,
Shadow Details, Scan Edge to Edge and Sharpness before you fax the document
•
Custom Job—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
•
Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
Faxing
144
•
Scan Preview—Displays the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused, and a preview image appears.
•
Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Improving fax quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
•
Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
•
Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that contain only text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
When should I use Photo mode?
•
Use Text/Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics.
•
Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Fax Settings.
4
Click Analog Fax Setup.
5
Click Holding Faxes.
6
Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box.
Note: This may not be applicable in some cases.
7
From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
•
Off
•
Always On
•
Manual
•
Scheduled
Faxing
145
8
If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps. Otherwise, click Submit.
a
Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b
From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c
From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d
From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
e
Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Fax Settings.
4
Click Analog Fax Setup.
5
From the Fax Forwarding menu under Fax Receive settings, select one of the following:
•
•
Print and Forward
•
Forward
6
From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
7
Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box, and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the “Forward to” menu.
8
Click Submit.
Faxing
146
Scanning to an FTP address
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer. Sending a document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over your network instead of over the phone line.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch FTP.
4
Type the FTP address.
5
Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Scanning to an FTP address
147
3
Press #, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4
Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3
On the home screen, touch FTP.
4
Touch Search Address Book.
5
Type the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.
6
Touch the name that you want to add to the To: field.
7
Touch Send It.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of typing the entire FTP site address using the keypad each time you want to send a document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using a computer or using the printer touch screen.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.
4
Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5
Enter the appropriate information into the boxes.
6
Enter a shortcut number.
7
Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1
On the home screen, touch FTP.
2
Type the address of the FTP site.
Scanning to an FTP address
148
3
Touch Save as Shortcut.
4
Enter a name for the shortcut.
5
Touch Enter.
6
Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7
Touch Send It to start the scan, or touch to return to the home screen.
Understanding FTP options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy.
•
Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with your new setting displayed.
•
When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
•
When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Binding
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Scanning to an FTP address
149
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG, or XPS) for the scanned image.
•
PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
•
Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
•
TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•
JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
•
XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file.
•
Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
•
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
•
Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
•
Color—Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP site, computer, e-mail address, or the printer.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•
Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, and Mirror Image before you scan the document
•
Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
•
Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
•
Scan Preview—Displays the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
•
Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•
Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out
Scanning to an FTP address
150
Improving FTP quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
•
Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of sending a document to an FTP site, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
•
Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that only contain text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
When should I use Photo mode?
•
Use Text/Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that contains a mixture of text and graphics.
•
Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
Use Photo mode when the original document is composed mostly of photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.
Scanning to an FTP address
151
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Scan Profile.
3
Click Create Scan Profile.
Note: Your computer must have java program installed to be able to create a scan profile.
4
Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
5
Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
6
Enter a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
7
Click Submit.
8
Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents.
9
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
10
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
152
11
Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and then touch Profiles.
12
After you enter the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.
13
Touch Finish the Job.
14
Return to the computer to view the file.
The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning to a flash drive
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2
If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3
Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
4
Touch Scan to USB drive.
5
Select the size and file that you want to scan.
6
Touch Scan It.
Understanding scan profile options
Quick Setup
This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings. You can select one of these settings:
Custom
Text - BW PDF
Text - BW TIFF
Photo - Color JPEG
Photo - Color TIFF
Text/Photo - BW PDF
Text/Photo - Color PDF
To customize the scan job settings, from the Quick Setup menu, select Custom. Then change the scan settings as needed.
Format Type
This option sets the output (PDF, JPEG, TIFF, SECURE PDF, or XPS) for the scanned image.
•
PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
•
JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
153
•
TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•
Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
•
XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Compression
This option sets the format (Zlib, JPEG or None) used to compress the scanned output file.
Default Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Default Content affects the quality and size of your scanned file.
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
Photo—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
Color
This option tells the printer the color of the original documents. You can select Gray, BW (Black and White), or Color.
Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.
JPEG Quality
This option adjusts the degree of compression for scanned JPEG documents in relation to the original document.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
154
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Advanced Imaging
•
Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output.
•
Contrast—Adjusts output contrast.
•
Shadow Detail—Adjusts the visible detail in the shadows.
•
Sharpness—Adjusts output sharpness.
•
Color Dropout—Eliminates a color from a form, improving Optical Character Recognition capabilities.
•
Scan edge to edge—Scans edge to edge.
•
Mirror Image—Creates a mirror image scan.
•
Negative Image—Creates a negative image scan.
•
JPEG Quality—Selects a JPEG quality.
Improving scan quality
Question
When should I use Text mode?
Tip
•
Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
•
Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that only contain text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?
When should I use Photo mode?
•
Use Text/Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics.
•
Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
155
Understanding printer menus
Menus list
A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings. To access the menus, touch on the home screen.
Paper Menu
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
Reports
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network <x> Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
NetWare Setup Page
Print Fonts
Print Directory 1
Asset Report
Network/Ports
Active NIC
Standard Network
2
Standard USB Menu
3
Parallel Menu
SMTP Setup
1 Only appears if there is an installed or mounted flash device.
2
Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network <x>.
3
This menu only appears if a standard USB port is supported.
Security
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Security Audit Log
Set Date/Time
Settings
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E-mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Help
Print All
Print Quality
Media Guide
Print Defects
Menu Map
Information Guide
Connection Guide
Moving Guide
Understanding printer menus
156
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Menu item
Default Source
Tray <x>
MP Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Env
Description
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Notes:
•
Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•
Only an installed paper source will appear as a menu setting.
•
A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source setting for the duration of the print job.
•
If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.
•
From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Size/Type menu
Configure MP menu
Menu item
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
Description
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
•
Cassette is the factory default setting.
•
The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an automatic paper source.
•
When Manual is selected, the multipurpose feeder can be used only for manual feed print jobs.
Substitute Size menu
Menu item
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Description
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available
Notes:
•
All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are allowed.
•
The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed.
•
Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message appearing.
Understanding printer menus
157
Paper Texture menu
Menu item
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Description
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray
Notes:
•
Normal is the factory default setting.
•
Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Rough Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
158
Menu item
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Rough Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Custom <x> Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Description
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Menu item
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Description
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
159
Menu item
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Light Weight
Light
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Custom <x>
Light
Normal
Heavy
Description
Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper type loaded in a specific tray
Notes:
•
Normal is the factory default setting.
•
Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.
Understanding printer menus
160
Paper Loading menu
Menu item
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Custom <x> Loading
Duplex
Off
Description
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Labels as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Light as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Custom <x> as the paper type
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Custom <x> Loading is available only if the custom type is supported.
Notes:
•
Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.
•
If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided jobs.
Understanding printer menus
161
Custom Types menu
Menu item
Custom Type <x>
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Labels
Envelope
Rough/Cotton
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Labels
Envelope
Description
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom
Type <x> name or a user-defined Custom Name created from the
Embedded Web Server or MarkVision
TM displays instead of Custom Type <x>.
Professional. This user-defined name
Notes:
•
Paper is the factory default setting for the Custom Type.
•
The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder in order for you to print from that source.
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus
Notes:
•
Paper is the factory default setting.
•
The Recycled type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder in order for you to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Menu item
Custom Name <x>
<none>
Definition
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces a Custom Type
<x> name in the printer menus.
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Menu item
Custom Scan Size <x>
Scan Size Name
Width
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)
Height
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)
Orientation
Landscape
Portrait
2 scans per side
Off
On
Description
Specifies a custom scan size name and options. This name replaces a Custom
Scan Size <x> name in the printer menus.
Notes:
•
8.5 Inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 216 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.
•
14 Inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 356 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.
•
Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.
•
Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
•
User Default is the factory default setting for ADF Pick Roller Force.
Understanding printer menus
162
Universal Setup menu
These menu items are used to specify the height, width, and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal
Paper Size is a user-defined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options, such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.
Menu item
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Portrait Width
3–14 inches
76–360 mm
Portrait Height
3–14 inches
76–360 mm
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Description
Identifies the units of measure
Notes:
•
Inches is the US factory default setting.
•
Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Sets the portrait width
Notes:
•
If the width exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum width allowed.
•
8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in 0.01-inch increments.
•
216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can be increased in 1-mm increments.
Sets the portrait height
Notes:
•
If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum height allowed.
•
14 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in
0.01-inch increments.
•
356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can be increased in 1-mm increments.
Specifies the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction
Notes:
•
Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•
Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray.
Reports menu
Note: When you select a menu item from the Reports menu, the indicated report prints.
Menu item
Menu Settings Page
Description
Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays, installed memory, the total page count, alarms, timeouts, the control panel language, the TCP/IP address, the status of supplies, the status of the network connection, and other information
Understanding printer menus
163
Menu item
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network <x> Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
NetWare Setup Page
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Description
Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information
Note: This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information
Notes:
•
This menu item is available when more than one network option is installed.
•
This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes
Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls
Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts
Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer
Prints a report containing NetWare-specific information about the network settings
Note: This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server installed.
Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer
Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk
Notes:
•
Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
•
The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed correctly and working properly.
Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database.
Understanding printer menus
164
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Menu item
Active NIC
Auto
<list of available network cards>
Description
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network <x> menus
Menu item
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
165
Menu item
Network Buffer
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Std Network Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
NetWare
Net <x> Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
Apple Talk
NetWare
Description
Sets the size of the network input buffer
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
The value can be changed in 1K increments.
•
The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•
To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel and USB buffers.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•
The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
For descriptions and settings of the network setup menus, see the following:
•
“Reports menu (under the Network/Ports menu)” on page 166
•
“Network Card menu” on page 167
•
•
•
•
•
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.
Reports menu (under the Network/Ports menu)
The Reports menu item is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Understanding printer menus
166
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª Reports
Menu item
Print Setup Page
Print NetWare Setup Page
Description
Prints a report containing information about the current network setup
Notes:
•
The Setup Page contains information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
•
The NetWare Setup Page menu item appears only on models that support NetWare and shows information about NetWare settings.
Network Card menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª Network Card
Menu item
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View Card Speed
Network Address
UAA
LAA
Job Timeout
0-225 seconds
Description
Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card
Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card
Lets you view the network addresses
Banner Page
Off
On
Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can take before it is canceled
Notes:
•
90 seconds is the factory default setting.
•
A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
•
If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.
Allows the printer to print a banner page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP/IP information.
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Understanding printer menus
167
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª TCP/IP
Menu item
Activate
On
Off
View Hostname
Description
Activates TCP/IP
Note: On is the factory default setting.
IP Address
Lets you view the current TCP/IP hostname
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Address
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Netmask
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Gateway
Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Netmask
Gateway
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Enable RARP
On
Off
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Enable Auto IP
Yes
No
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
WINS Server Address
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
DNS Server Address
Specifies the RARP address assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using the
File Transfer Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enables the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When this is enabled, the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Lets you view or change the current WINS Server Address
Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Lets you view or change the current DNS Server Address
Understanding printer menus
168
Menu item
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
Description
Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting
Note: No is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) information.
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª IPv6
Menu item
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Auto Configuration
On
Off
View Hostname
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Description
Enables IPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Lets you view the current setting
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Network <x> ª Net <x> Setup ª Wireless
Menu item
Network Mode
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Description
Specifies the network mode
Notes:
•
Infrastructure mode lets the printer access a network using an access point.
•
Ad hoc is the factory default setting. Ad hoc mode configures the printer for wireless networking directly between it and a computer.
Understanding printer menus
169
Menu item
Compatibility
802.11n
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Choose Network
<list of available networks>
View Signal Quality
View Security Mode
Description
Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use
Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection
Lets you view the encryption method for the wireless connection.
“Disabled” indicates that the wireless network is not encrypted.
AppleTalk menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª AppleTalk
Menu item
Activate
Yes
No
View Name
Description
Activates AppleTalk support
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Address
Set Zone
<list of zones available on the network>
Shows the assigned AppleTalk name
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Shows the assigned AppleTalk address
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network
Note: The default setting is the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists, the zone marked with an * is the default setting.
NetWare menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports ª Standard Network or Network <x> ª Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup ª NetWare
Menu item
Activate
Yes
No
View Login Name
Description
Activates NetWare support
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Print Mode
Lets you view the assigned NetWare login name
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Lets you view the assigned NetWare print mode
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding printer menus
170
Menu item
Network Number
Select IPX Frame Types
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet Type II
Ethernet SNAP
Packet Burst
Yes
No
NSQ/GSQ Mode
Yes
No
Description
Lets you view the assigned NetWare network number
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Enables the Ethernet frame type setting
Note: On is the factory default setting for all menu items.
Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Specifies the NSQ/GSQ Mode setting
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Menu item
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off.
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off.
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
171
Menu item
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
USB With ENA
ENA Address
ENA Netmask
ENA Gateway
Description
Sets the size of the USB input buffer
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
•
The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
•
The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether the Resource Save setting is On or Off.
•
To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•
The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
Parallel menu
This menu appears only if an optional parallel card is installed.
Menu item
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding printer menus
172
Menu item
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <max size allowed>
Advanced Status
On
Off
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the size of the parallel input buffer
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
•
The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1K increments.
•
The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.
•
To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
The Off setting disables parallel port negotiation.
Specifies the parallel port protocol
Notes:
•
Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
•
The Standard setting tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Understanding printer menus
173
Menu item
Honor Init
On
Off
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Description
Determines whether or not the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computer
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on.
Determines whether the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of strobe
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
This menu appears only if a standard or optional parallel port is available.
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•
The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a parallel cable.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through a parallel port.
Parallel With ENA
ENA Address
ENA Netmask
ENA Gateway
Serial <x> menu
This menu appears only if an optional serial card is installed.
Menu item
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding printer menus
174
Menu item
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Serial Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XON/XOFF/DTRDSR
Description
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
When the On setting is used, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.
•
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
•
When the Auto setting is used, the printer examines data, determines the format, and then processes it appropriately.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Sets the size of the serial input buffer
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting.
•
The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
•
The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1-K increments.
•
The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.
•
To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, USB, and network buffers.
•
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port
Notes:
•
DTR is the factory default setting.
•
DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
•
XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
•
XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings.
Understanding printer menus
175
Menu item
Robust XON
On
Off
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Data Bits
7
8
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Honor DSR
On
Off
Description
Determines whether or not the printer communicates availability to the computer
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port
Notes:
•
9600 is the factory default setting.
•
138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are displayed only in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option or Serial
Option 2 menus.
Specifies the number of data bits that are sent in each transmission frame
Note: 7 is the factory default setting.
Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal. DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print. Select On to prevent stray characters from printing.
•
This menu item appears only if Serial RS-232/RS-422 is set to RS 232.
Understanding printer menus
176
SMTP Setup menu
Use the following menu to configure the SMTP server.
Menu item
Primary SMTP Gateway
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Description
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port. Range is 1-65536.
Reply Address
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send the e-mail
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in e-mail sent by the printer
Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server
Notes:
•
Disabled is the factory default setting for Use SSL.
•
When the Negotiate setting is used, your SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
Specifies the type of user authentication required
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM-MD5
Digest-MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Device-Initiated E-mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the
SMTP server. Some SMTP servers require credentials in order to send email.
Notes:
•
None is the factory default setting for Device-Initiated E-mail.
•
Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when "Use Device SMTP Credentials" is selected.
Understanding printer menus
177
Security menu
Miscellaneous menu
Menu item
Login Restrictions
Login failures
1-10 (3 attempts)
Failure time frame
1-60 (5 minutes)
Lockout time
1-60 (5 minutes)
Panel Login Timeout
1-900 (3 seconds)
Remote Login Timeout
1-120 (10 minutes)
Description
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out
Notes:
•
“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. 3 attempts is the factory default setting.
•
“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
•
“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
•
“Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off. 3 seconds is the factory default setting.
•
“Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface (for example, the Web page) can remain idle before automatically logging the user off. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Menu item
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Description
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered
Notes:
•
Off is the default setting.
•
This menu item appears only if a printer hard disk is installed.
•
Once a limit is reached, the jobs for that user name and that PIN are deleted.
Limits the amount of time a confidential job stays in the printer before it is deleted
Notes:
•
Off is the default setting.
•
If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential jobs reside on the printer RAM or printer hard disk, the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.
•
If the printer is turned off, all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted.
Understanding printer menus
178
Security Audit Log menu
Menu item
Export Log
Description
Enables an authorized user to export the security log
Notes:
•
To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached to the printer.
•
From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer.
Specifies whether audit logs are deleted
Note: Delete Now is the factory default setting.
Delete Log
Delete now
Do not delete
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
Yes
No
Remote Syslog Facility
0-23
Severity of events to log
0-7
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created
Notes:
•
Enable audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
•
Enable remote syslog determines if logs are being sent to a remote server. No is the factory default setting.
•
Remote syslog facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
•
With the security audit log activated, the severity value of each event is recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
Set Date/Time menu
Menu item
View Date/Time
Set Date/Time
<input date/time>
Time Zone
<list of time zones>
Observe DST
On
Off
Enable NTP
On
Off
Description
Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM format.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting.
Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
179
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Menu item
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Turkce
Korean
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Description
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display
Note: All languages may not be available for all printers.
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its factory default settings.
•
The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
•
Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job by duplexing each page. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
•
Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media.
Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loaded
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible.
Understanding printer menus
180
Menu item
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Turkce
Custom Key <x>
Accents/Symbols Tab
On
Off
Russian/Polish Tab
On
Off
Korean Tab
On
Off
Chinese Pinyin Tab
On
Off
Chinese Zhuyin Tab
On
Off
Paper Sizes
U.S.
Metric
Description
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard
Notes:
•
Yes is the factory default setting.
•
After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
Country select screen, the default becomes No.
Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard.
Specifies the printer factory default measurements. The default is determined by the country/region selection in the initial setup wizard.
Understanding printer menus
181
Menu item
Scan to PC Port Range
<port range>
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text <x>
<text entry>
Cartridge levels on status screen
On
Off
Black Toner
When to Display
Display
Do not display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
<text entry>
Alternate Message
<text entry>
Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Description
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port-blocking firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen
For the Left side and Right side options, choose from the following options:
Model Name
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text <x>
Notes:
•
IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•
Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
•
Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
Display.
•
Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display.
The displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service
Errors can be customized with the following options:
Activate
Yes
No
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
<text entry>
Alternate Message
<text entry>
Notes:
•
No is the factory default setting for Activate.
•
Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Understanding printer menus
182
Menu item
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Date Format
MM-DD-YYYY
DD-MM-YYYY
YYYY-MM-DD
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Screen Brightness
20–100
One Page Copy
On
Off
Output Lighting
Standard Bin LED
Normal/Standby Mode
Bright
Dim
Off
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
Off
Show Bookmarks
Yes
No
Description
Additional buttons can be added to the Home screen, and default buttons can be removed.
Available selections for each button are:
Display
Do Not Display
Formats the printer date
Formats the printer time
Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen
Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional output bin
Notes:
•
In Normal/Standby Mode, the factory default is Bright.
•
In Power Saver Mode, the factory default is Dim.
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area
Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When On is selected, bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Understanding printer menus
183
Menu item
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Contact Name
Location
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
2–240
Description
Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan to USB
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the image will be removed.
Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file
Notes:
•
A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.
•
On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the Allow
Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF
Notes:
•
If Job level is selected, the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.
•
If Page level is selected, rescan from the jammed page forward.
Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Specifies a contact name for the printer
Specifies the location of the printer
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator intervention
Available selections for each alarm type are:
Off
Single
Notes:
•
Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single sounds three quick beeps.
•
Off is the factory default setting for Toner Alarm. Off means no alarm will sound.
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system enters a lower power state
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
184
Menu item
Timeouts
Power Saver Mode
Disabled
2–240
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
Disabled
5–255
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Description
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before some systems begin entering a minimum power state.
Notes:
•
30 minutes is the factory default setting.
•
Power Saver does not interact with Standby Mode.
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the printer display to a Ready state
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the print job
Notes:
•
90 seconds is the factory default setting.
•
When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.
•
Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job
Notes:
•
40 seconds is the factory default setting.
•
Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL or
PPDS emulation print jobs.
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue
Notes:
•
30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period
Notes:
•
Disabled is the factory default setting.
•
5–255 is a range of time in seconds.
Understanding printer menus
185
Menu item
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Print Recovery
Page Protect
On
Off
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Description
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages
Notes:
•
Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
•
On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
•
Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
•
On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints.
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings
Notes:
•
Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore keeps the user-defined settings.
•
Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
Copy Settings menu
Menu item
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Printed Image
Text
Description
Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job
Notes:
•
Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.
•
Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures.
This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
•
Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images. Printed
Image converts the images to halftone. Halftoning makes a grayscale or color image printable by transforming it to a pattern of small spots with a limited number of colors.
•
Text emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background.
Understanding printer menus
186
Menu item
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Description
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two-sided) or simplex (onesided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex
Notes:
•
1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied page will have printing on one side.
•
1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original is six sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.
•
2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copied page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original draft is three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet, then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.
•
2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copy mimics the original exactly.
Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2 on 1 Portrait
2 on 1 Landscape
4 on 1 Portrait
4 on 1 Landscape
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Collate
On
Off
Staple
On
Off
Specifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the margins
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies of the job
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enables stapling
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
187
Menu item
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Copy To Source
Tray <x>
Single Sheet Feeder
Multi Sheet Feeder
Auto Size Match
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Darkness
1–9
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Number of Copies
Description
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Specifies a paper source
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job
Specifies which output bin receives the copy after it is printed
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job
Understanding printer menus
188
Menu item
Header/Footer
Top left
Top left
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Header/Footer
Top middle
Top middle
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Header/Footer
Top right
Top right
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Description
Specifies header/footer information for the top left of the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting for Top left.
•
“All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Specifies header/footer information for the middle of the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting for Top middle.
•
“All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Specifies header/footer information for the top right of the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting for Top right.
•
“All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Understanding printer menus
189
Menu item
Header/Footer
Bottom left
Bottom left
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Header/Footer
Bottom middle
Bottom middle
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Header/Footer
Bottom right
Bottom right
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Description
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom left of the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left.
•
“All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom middle of the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle.
•
“All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom right of the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right.
•
“All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Understanding printer menus
190
Menu item
Overlay
Off
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Custom Overlay
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Auto Center
On
Off
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
On
Off
Description
Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies custom overlay text
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
•
None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•
128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
191
Menu item
Negative Image
On
Off
Shadow Detail
0–4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Sample Copy
On
Off
Fax Settings menu
Description
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to copying
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a copy
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Creates a sample copy of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Menu item
Station Name
Station Number
Station ID
Station Name
Station Number
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
Description
Specifies the name of the fax within the printer
Specifies a number associated with the fax
Specifies how the fax is identified to recipients in the fax header
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone hand set
Notes:
•
Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.
•
Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Understanding printer menus
192
Menu item
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly sent
All send
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Caller ID
FSK
DTMF
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Digits to mask
0–58
Description
Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs
Notes:
•
“All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
•
“Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
•
Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
•
“Mostly sent” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
•
“All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
Specifies whether the user may cancel fax jobs
Note: If Cancel Faxes is not enabled, it does not appear as an option.
Specifies the type of caller ID being used
Notes:
•
FSK is the factory default setting.
•
This option appears only when the selected country/region supports multiple caller ID patterns.
Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask” setting.
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number
Understanding printer menus
193
Fax Cover Page
Menu item
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never Use
Always Use
Include To field
On
Off
Include From field
On
Off
From
Include Message field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer <x>
Footer <x>
Fax Send Settings
Menu item
Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Description
Configures the fax cover page
Note: Off is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Description
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality, but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
194
Menu item
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Duplex
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Description
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Content
Text
Text/Photo
Photograph
Darkness
1–9
Dial Prefix
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule <x>
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
•
Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax
Notes:
•
Text is used when the document is mostly text.
•
Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
•
Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers
Establishes a dialing prefix rule
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
195
Menu item
Redial Frequency
1–200
Behind a PABX
Yes
No
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Driver to fax
Yes
No
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Description
Specifies the number of minutes between redials
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file
Notes:
•
A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.
•
On is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Notes:
•
A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.
•
Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
196
Menu item
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Mirror Image
On
Off
Negative Image
On
Off
Shadow Detail
-4 to +4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Enable Color Fax Scans
On by default
Never use
Always use
Off by default
Auto Convert Color Faxes to
Mono Faxes
On
Off
Description
Specifies which color to drop during faxing, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
•
None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•
128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to faxing
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the sharpness of a fax
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enables color faxing
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.
Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
197
Fax Receive Settings
Menu item
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Rings to Answer
1–25
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Paper Source
Auto
Tray <x>
Multi-Purpose Feeder
Separator Sheets
None
After job
Before job
Separator Sheet Source
Tray <x>
Manual feeder
Sides (Duplex)
On
Off
Fax Footer
On
Off
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Fax Forwarding
Forward
Print and Forward
Description
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allows a fax to be held until toner or supplies are replaced
Notes:
•
This menu item appears only if a hard disk is supported and installed.
•
None is the factory default setting.
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Places a sheet of paper before or after a received fax.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Specifies a paper source.
Note: Tray <x> is the factory default setting.
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient
Understanding printer menus
198
Menu item
Forward to
Fax
FTP
LDSS eSF
Forward to Shortcut
Block No Name Fax
On
Off
Banned Fax List
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off
Fax Log Settings
Menu item
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Description
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded
Note: This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail,
FPT, LDSS, or eSF)
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer
Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lets you receive a color fax
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Description
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Enables automatic printing of fax logs
Notes:
•
Logs print after every 200 jobs.
•
On is the factory default setting.
Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs
Note: Tray <x> is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
199
Menu item
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Speaker Settings
Menu item
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Ringer Volume
On
Off
Distinctive Rings
Menu item
Single Ring
On
Off
Double Ring
On
Off
Triple Ring
On
Off
Description
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enables access to the Fax Job log
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enables access to the Fax Call log
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Description
Notes:
•
Always Off turns the speaker off.
•
On until Connected is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and issues a noise until the fax connection is made.
•
Always On turns the speaker on.
Controls the volume setting
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Description
Answers calls with a one-ring pattern
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answers calls with a double-ring pattern
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answers calls with a triple-ring pattern
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
200
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Fax Server Setup
Menu item
To Format
Reply Address
Subject
Message
Primary SMTP Gateway
Description
Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Specifies the image type for scan to fax
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Content
Text
Text/Photo
Photograph
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax
Notes:
•
Text is used when the document is mostly text.
•
Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
•
Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 factory default setting.
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
201
Menu item
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Description
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enables analog fax receive
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable Analog Receive
On
Off
E-mail Settings menu
Menu item
E-mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
E-mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Description
Specifies e-mail server information
Note: The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the creator of the e-mail
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
202
Menu item
E-mail Server Setup
Max e-mail size
0–65535 KB
E-mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
E-mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
E-mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
Base file name
Web Link
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Color
Gray
Color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Description
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes
Note: E-mail above the specified size is not sent.
Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit
Sends an e-mail only when the address contains the domain name, such as a company domain name
Note: E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
Defines the e-mail server path name; for example: /directory/path
The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path name: * : ? <
> |.
Specifies the format of the file
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e-mail
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e-mail
Notes:
•
Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
•
Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
•
Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
203
Menu item
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Description
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Text Default
5–90
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
•
Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Notes:
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
204
Menu item
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Photo Default
5–90
E-mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Description
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Specifies how the images will be sent
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Specifies a paper source for printing e-mail logs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Manual Env
MP Feeder
E-mail Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan Preview
On
Off
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when
Color is set to Off.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Notes:
•
A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.
•
Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Notes:
•
A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.
•
Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
205
Menu item
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
On
Off
Negative Image
On
Off
Shadow Detail
-4 to +4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Use cc:/bcc:
On
Off
Description
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the E-mail
Destination screen.
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
•
•
None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
206
Color
Gray
Color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
FTP Settings menu
Menu item
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Description
Specifies the format of the FTP file
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP
Notes:
•
Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
•
Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print
•
Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
207
Menu item
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Description
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Text Default
5–90
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Photo Default
5–90
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
•
Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Notes:
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
208
Menu item
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Manual Env
MP Feeder
FTP bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Base File Name
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Scan Preview
On
Off
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Description
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Specifies a paper source for FTP logs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Lets you enter a base file name
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Notes:
•
A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available
•
Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Notes:
•
A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available
•
Off is the factory default setting.
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
209
Menu item
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
On
Off
Negative Image
On
Off
Shadow Detail
0–4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Menu item
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Description
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
•
None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•
128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Description
Specifies the format of the file
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
210
Menu item
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Color
Gray
Color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Darkness
1–9
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
ID Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Description
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB
Notes:
•
Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
•
Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
•
Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
211
Menu item
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Text Default
5–90
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Photo Default
5–90
Use Multi-Page TIFF
On
Off
Scan bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Base File Name
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Description
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
•
Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Notes:
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
•
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
•
This menu item applies to Text, Text/Photo, and all scan functions.
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to USB job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Lets you enter a base file name
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Notes:
•
A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available
•
Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
212
Menu item
Scan Preview
On
Off
Background Removal
-4 to +4
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Mirror Image
On
Off
Negative Image
On
Off
Shadow Detail
0–4
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Sharpness
0–5
Print Settings
Menu item
Copies
Description
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Notes:
•
A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available
•
Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout
Notes:
•
None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•
128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Description
Specifies the number of copies to print
Understanding printer menus
213
Menu item
Paper Source
Tray <x>
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Orientation
Auto
Portrait
Landscape
N-up (pages/side)
Off
2 Up
3 Up
4 Up
6 Up
9 Up
12 Up
16 Up
N-up Border
None
Solid
N-up Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Description
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print from the flash drive
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.
•
The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing)
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
•
Long Edge is the factory default setting.
•
Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages.
•
Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages.
Specifies the orientation of the print job
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper.
This is also referred to as Paper Saver.
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up
Notes:
•
Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•
Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Understanding printer menus
214
Menu item
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Sheet Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print Settings
Setup menu
Menu item
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
PPDS Emulation
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Description
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Specifies a paper source
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Description
Sets the default printer language
Notes:
•
PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs. PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs.
•
PCL is the factory default printer language.
•
Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Sets the logical and physical printable area
Notes:
•
This menu does not appear if Edge to Edge is enabled in the printer Setup menu.
•
Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
•
The Whole Page setting allows the image to be moved into the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.
•
The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using a
PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Understanding printer menus
215
Menu item
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Resource Save
On
Off
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Finishing menu
Menu item
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Description
Sets the storage location for downloads
Notes:
•
RAM is the factory default setting.
•
Storing downloads in flash memory places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory even when the printer is turned off.
•
Storing downloads in RAM is temporary.
•
This menu appears only if a flash option is installed.
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
•
The On setting retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory,
38 Memory Full appears, and downloads are not deleted.
Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected
Notes:
•
Alphabetical is the factory default setting.
•
Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Description
Specifies whether duplex (2-sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs
Notes:
•
1 sided is the factory default setting.
•
To set 2-sided printing from the software program: for Windows users, click
File ª Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup; for
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
Print dialog and pop-up menus.
Understanding printer menus
216
Menu item
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Copies
1–999
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Multi-Purpose Feeder
Description
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
•
Long Edge is the factory default setting.
•
Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages.
•
Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages.
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
•
Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies menu setting.
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:
•
None is the factory default setting.
•
Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•
Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•
Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a document for notes.
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets
Notes:
•
Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•
From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
Multi-Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Understanding printer menus
217
Menu item
N-up (pages-side)
Off
2-Up
3-Up
4-Up
6-Up
9-Up
12-Up
16-Up
N-up Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
N-up Border
None
Solid
Quality menu
Menu item
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both Directions
Description
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up (pages-sides)
Notes:
•
Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•
Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page sheet
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up (pages-sides)
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Description
Specifies the printed output resolution
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting. The printer driver default is 1200 IQ.
Enhances the printed quality of small fonts and graphics
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Fonts applies this setting only to text.
•
Horizontally darkens horizontal lines of text and images.
•
Vertically darkens vertical lines of text and images.
•
Both Directions darkens horizontal and vertical lines on text and images.
Understanding printer menus
218
Menu item
Toner Darkness
1–10
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Gray Correction
Auto
Off
Brightness
-6 to +6
Contrast
0–5
Description
Lightens or darkens the printed output
Notes:
•
8 is the factory default setting.
•
Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in a browser window.
Adjusts the gray value of printed output
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Adjusts or darkens printed output and conserves toner
Notes:
•
0 is the factory default setting.
•
A negative value will darken text, images, and graphics. A positive value will lighten them and conserve toner.
Adjusts the degree of difference between levels of gray in printed output
Notes:
•
0 is the factory default setting.
•
Higher settings show more difference between levels of gray.
Utilities menu
Menu item
Format Flash
Yes
No
Description
Formats the flash memory. Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is formatting.
Notes:
•
A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available. The flash memory option card must not be Read/Write or Write protected.
•
Selecting Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
•
No cancels the format request.
Understanding printer menus
219
Menu item
Hex Trace
Activate
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
XPS menu
Menu item
Print Error Pages
Off
On
PDF menu
Menu item
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Annotations
Do Not Print
PostScript menu
Menu item
Print PS Error
On
Off
Font Priority
Resident
Flash
Description
Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem
Notes:
•
When Activate is selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed.
•
To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of black on a page. The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Description
Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Description
Scales page content to fit the selected paper size
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Prints annotations in a PDF
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Description
Prints a page containing the PostScript error
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Establishes the font search order
Notes:
•
Resident is the factory default setting.
•
A formatted optional flash memory card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.
•
The optional flash memory card cannot be Read/Write, Write, or password protected.
•
Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Understanding printer menus
220
PCL Emul menu
Menu item
Font Source
Resident
Download
Flash
All
Font Name
<list of fonts>
Symbol Set
<list of symbol sets>
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Description
Specifies the set of fonts available
Notes:
•
Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded into RAM.
•
Download appears only if downloaded fonts exist. It shows all the fonts downloaded into RAM.
•
Flash appears only if an optional flash memory card containing fonts is installed.
•
An optional flash memory card must be properly formatted and cannot be
Read/Write, Write, or password protected.
•
All shows all fonts available to any option.
Lets you view or change the setting from a selection list
Lets you view or change the setting from a selection list
Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts
Notes:
•
12 is the factory default setting.
•
Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.
•
Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25-point increments.
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts
Notes:
•
10 is the factory default setting.
•
Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).
•
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.
•
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed.
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page
Notes:
•
Portrait is the factory default setting.
•
Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.
•
Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
Understanding printer menus
221
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray <x>
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Man Env
Off
None
0–199
Menu item
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Description
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
•
60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international factory default setting.
•
The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
Sets the printer to print on A4-size paper
Notes:
•
198 mm is the factory default setting.
•
The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10-pitch characters.
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control command
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control command
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
None is not an available selection. It is displayed only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
•
None ignores the Select Paper Feed command.
•
0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding printer menus
222
Menu item
Tray Renumber
View Factory Def
Multipurpose feeder default = 8
Tray 1 default = 1
Tray 2 default = 4
Tray 3 default = 5
Tray 4 default = 20
Tray 5 default = 21
Envelope default = 6
Manual paper default = 2
Manual envelope default = 3
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Description
Lets you view the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder
Notes:
•
The printer supports one standard 250-sheet tray and can have only one optional drawer installed, either the 250- or 550-sheet drawer. Therefore, only Tray 1 and Tray 2 of the Tray values apply to your printer
•
The factory default settings appear even if the source is not installed.
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings
PPDS menu
Menu item
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Lines per Page
1–255
Lines per Inch
0.25–30.00
Page Format
Whole
Description
Sets the orientation of the text and graphics on the page
Notes:
•
Portrait is the factory default setting.
•
Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Sets the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
•
64 is the factory default setting.
•
The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired Paper
Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
Sets the number of lines that print per inch
Notes:
•
6 is the factory default setting.
•
Lines per Inch can be increased or decreased in 0.25-inch increments
Sets the logical and physical printable area of the page
Notes:
•
Print is the factory default setting. Print data maintains its position with respect to edge of the paper.
•
When Whole is selected, document margins are calculated from the top left corner of the physical edge of the page.
•
Printing does not occur outside the printable area.
Understanding printer menus
223
Menu item
Character Set
1
2
Best Fit
On
Off
Tray 1 Renumber
Off
Tray 2
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Description
Specifies a default character set for PPDS print jobs
Notes:
•
2 is the factory default setting. Character Set 2 is composed of printable characters and symbols used in non-US English languages.
•
When Characters Set 1 is selected, values given to the printer are interpreted as printer commands.
Replaces a missing font with a similar font
Note: On is the factory default setting. If the requested font is not found, the printer will use a similar font.
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Tray 2 is displayed only when it is installed.
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control command
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control command
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Understanding printer menus
224
HTML menu
Menu item
Font Name
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Menu item
Font Size
1–255 pt
Scale
1–400%
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
Description
Sets the default font for HTML documents
Notes:
•
The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do not specify a font.
•
The following fonts appear only if the appropriate DBCS font card is installed: HG-GothicB, MSung-Light, MD_DotumChe, and MingMT-
Light.
Description
Sets the default font size for HTML documents
Notes:
•
12 pt is the factory default setting.
•
Font size can be increased in 1-point increments.
Scales the default font for HTML documents
Notes:
•
100% is the factory default setting.
•
Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Sets the page margin for HTML documents
Notes:
•
19 mm is the factory default setting.
•
Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments.
Understanding printer menus
225
Menu item
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Image menu
Menu item
Auto Fit
On
Off
Invert
On
Off
Description
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Description
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation
Notes:
•
On is the factory default setting.
•
The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.
Inverts bi-tonal monochrome images
Notes:
•
Off is the factory default setting.
•
The font size can be increased in 1-point increments.
•
This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size
Notes:
•
Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•
When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Rev Portrait
Rev Landscape
Sets the image orientation
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
The Help menu consists of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs. They contain reference information about using the printer and performing tasks. You may select to print each one individually, or select Print all
guides to print all of them at one time.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available on the
Software and Documentation CD.
Understanding printer menus
226
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1
Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2
Remove all paper from the printer.
3
Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.
4
Wipe only the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5
Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before beginning a new print job.
Cleaning the scanner glass
If you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images, clean the areas shown.
1
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2
Open the scanner cover.
1
White underside of the ADF cover
2
White underside of the scanner cover
3
Scanner glass
4
ADF glass
Maintaining the printer
227
3
Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.
4
Close the scanner cover.
Cleaning the ADF separator rollers
After you have copied over 50,000 copies using the ADF, clean the ADF separator rollers.
1
Open the ADF cover.
2
Unlock the separator roll.
3
Remove the separator roll.
4
Use a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water to wipe the separator rollers.
Maintaining the printer
228
5
Reinstall the separator roll.
6
Lock the separator roll.
7
Close the ADF cover.
Adjusting scanner registration
Scanner Registration is a process to align the scan area with the paper location. To manually adjust the scanner registration:
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Clean the scanner glass and backing material.
3
Hold down and until the progress bar appears.
4
Release the buttons.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Diagnostic menu appears.
5
Touch the up or down arrow until Scanner Test appears.
6
Touch Scanner Test.
7
Touch the up or down arrow until Scanner Manual Registration appears.
8
Touch Scanner Manual Registration.
Maintaining the printer
229
9
Touch the left and right arrows to change the settings.
10
Touch Submit.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•
Direct sunlight
•
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•
High humidity above 80%
•
Salty air
•
Corrosive gases
•
Heavy dust
Checking the status of supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch Status/Supplies.
Note: If Status/Supplies is not on the home screen, then print a menu settings page to review the status of the supplies.
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Device Status. The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.
Maintaining the printer
230
Ordering supplies
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by the use of a supply or replacement item not produced by the manufacturer of this printer is not covered under warranty. Degraded print quality may result from using supplies or replacement items not produced by the manufacturer of this printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.
Printer attached to a network
1
Type your printer IP address in your Web browser to launch the Dell Configuration Web Tool.
2
Click www.dell.com/supplies.
Printer attached locally to a computer
1
Click or Start.
2
Click All Programs or Programs, and then select the printer program folder from the list.
3
Select Printer Home.
4
Choose your printer from the printer drop-down list.
5
Click Dell Printer Supplies Reorder Application.
The Order Toner Cartridges window opens.
6
Choose your printer model from the list.
7
Enter your Dell printer Service Tag number.
Note: Your Service Tag number is located inside the front cover of your printer.
8
Click Visit Dell's cartridge ordering website.
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
When 88 Cartridge low appears, or when you experience faded print, remove the toner cartridge. Firmly shake it side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner, and then reinsert it and continue printing.
When shaking the cartridge no longer improves the print quality, replace the toner cartridge.
Note: You can check to see approximately how much toner is left in your cartridge by printing a menu settings page.
Maintaining the printer
231
To replace the toner cartridge:
1
Open the front door by pressing the button on the left side of the printer and lowering the door.
2
Press the button on the base of the photoconductor kit. Pull the toner cartridge up and out using the handle.
3
Unpack the new toner cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing a toner cartridge, do not leave the photoconductor kit exposed to direct light for an extended period of time. Extended light exposure can cause print quality problems.
4
Rotate the cartridge in all directions to distribute the toner.
Maintaining the printer
232
5
Install the new toner cartridge by aligning the rollers on the toner cartridge with the arrows on the tracks of the photoconductor kit. Push the toner cartridge in as far as it will go. The cartridge clicks into place when correctly installed.
6
Close the front door.
Replacing the photoconductor kit
The printer automatically notifies you before the photoconductor kit reaches a page maximum by showing 84 PC
Kit life warning or 84 Replace PC Kit on the display. You can also see the status of the photoconductor kit by printing a menu settings page.
When 84 PC Kit life warning or 84 Replace PC Kit first appears, you should immediately order a new photoconductor kit. While the printer may continue to function properly after the photoconductor kit has reached its official end-of-life, print quality significantly decreases.
Note: The photoconductor kit is one item only.
Maintaining the printer
233
1
Open the front door by pressing the button on the left side of the printer and lowering the front door.
2
Pull the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge out of the printer as a unit by pulling on the toner cartridge handle.
Note: The photoconductor kit and toner cartridge form a unit.
Place the unit on a flat, clean surface.
3
Press the button on the base of the photoconductor kit. Pull the toner cartridge up and out using the handle.
Maintaining the printer
234
4
Unpack the new photoconductor kit. Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum.
5
Insert the toner cartridge into the photoconductor kit by aligning the rollers on the toner cartridge with the tracks.
Push the toner cartridge until it clicks into place.
6
Install the unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the guides of the unit with the arrows in the printer.
Push the unit as far as it will go.
Maintaining the printer
235
7
After you replace the photoconductor kit, reset the photoconductor counter. To reset the counter, see the instruction sheet that came with the new photoconductor kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Resetting the photoconductor counter without replacing the photoconductor may damage your printer and void your warranty.
8
Close the front door.
Recycling Dell products
To return Dell products for recycling:
1
Visit our Web site at www.dell.com/recycling.
2
Select your country from the list.
3
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Moving the printer to another location
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to move it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
•
Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
•
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•
Remove all printer options before moving the printer.
•
Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•
Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•
Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it. For more information, see
“Selecting a location for the printer” on page 20.
Maintaining the printer
236
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
•
Any cart used to move the printer must be able to support its weight and have a large enough surface to support the full footprint of the printer.
•
Keep the printer in an upright position.
•
Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer
237
Administrative support
Using the Embedded Web Server
If the printer is installed on a network, the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:
•
Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel
•
Checking the status of the printer supplies
•
Configuring printer settings
•
Configuring network settings
•
Viewing reports
To access the Embedded Web Server, type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Checking the device status
From the Device Status page of the Embedded Web Server, it is possible to see tray settings, the level of toner in the toner cartridge, the percentage of life remaining in the photoconductor kit, and capacity measurements of certain printer parts. To access the device status:
1
Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click the Device Status tab.
Setting up e-mail alerts
You can have the printer send you an e-mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed, added, or unjammed.
To set up e-mail alerts:
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Under Other Settings, click E-mail Alert Setup.
4
Select the items for notification, and type in the e-mail addresses.
5
Click Submit.
Note: See your system support person to set up the e-mail server.
Administrative support
238
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Restoring the factory default settings
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before you
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default setting. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and Network/Port menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Settings.
4
Touch General Settings.
5
Touch the down arrow until Factory Defaults appears.
6
Touch the left or right arrow until Restore Now appears.
7
Touch Submit.
8
Touch .
Administrative support
239
Clearing jams
By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps outlined in this section.
To clear a jam message and resume printing, clear the entire paper path, and then touch Continue. If Jam Recovery is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam Recovery is set to Auto, then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available.
Understanding jam messages and locations
Note: To resolve any message, all paper or specialty media must be cleared from the entire paper path.
Open doors and remove trays to access jam areas. The following illustration shows possible jam areas:
Access point Description
1
2
Push the button to open the front door. Inside are the toner cartridge and photoconductor kit.
Standard exit bin
3
4
5
6
Front door
Manual or multipurpose feeder door
Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)
Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 2)
7
8
Rear door
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Jam message numbers and how to access each jam
Jam number
200-201
202
To access the jam
Try one or more of the following:
•
Remove Tray 1.
•
Open the front door, and then remove the photoconductor kit.
Open the front door, and then open the rear door.
Clearing jams
240
Jam number
231
233
234
235
240-249
250
251
290-295
To access the jam
Open the front door, and then open the rear door.
Remove Tray 1, and then depress the lever.
Note: For alternative access to the jam, open the front door, and then open the rear door.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Open the front door, and then open the rear door.
•
Remove Tray 1, and then depress the lever.
Remove the jam from the standard exit bin.
Remove Tray 2.
Open the multipurpose feeder door.
Open the multipurpose feeder door.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Open the ADF cover, and then remove the separator roll.
•
Open the scanner cover.
•
Remove the ADF tray.
200 and 201 paper jams
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1
Pull the tray completely out.
Clearing jams
241
2
Remove the jam if you see it here.
3
If you do not see the jam, open the front door, and then remove the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.
4
Lift the flap at the front of the printer, and then remove any jammed sheets.
Clearing jams
242
5
If you do not see any jammed sheets, open the rear door.
6
Remove the jam.
7
Close the rear door.
8
Insert the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.
9
Close the front door.
10
Touch Continue.
202 paper jam
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam. If the paper is exiting the printer, then pull the paper out, and then touch Continue.
Clearing jams
243
If the paper is not exiting the printer:
1
Pull down the rear door.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
3
Close the rear door.
4
Touch Continue.
231 paper jam
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1
Open the front door.
2
Open the rear door.
Clearing jams
244
3
Remove the jam.
4
Close the rear door.
5
Close the front door.
6
Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
245
233 paper jam
1
Remove the tray from the printer.
2
Locate the lever shown, and then pull it down to release and remove the jammed sheets.
3
Insert the tray.
4
Touch Continue.
If this does not clear the jam, complete the steps in “231 paper jam” on page 244.
234 paper jam
A single jam or multiple jams are in the duplex area of the printer. To locate and remove the jammed sheets, complete all the steps in:
•
•
Clearing jams
246
235 paper jam
1
Gently pull the jammed sheet out of the standard exit bin.
2
Touch Continue.
240–249 paper jams
1
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2
Pull the standard tray out.
3
Remove any jammed paper.
4
Insert the tray, and then touch Continue.
5
If the jam message persists, then pull out any optional trays.
Clearing jams
247
6
Remove the jammed paper, and then insert the trays.
7
Touch Continue.
250 paper jam
1
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2
Remove the paper from the multipurpose feeder.
3
Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4
Load the paper into the multipurpose feeder.
5
Slide the paper guide toward the inside of the tray until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper.
6
Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
248
251 paper jam
A sheet of paper failed to feed from the multipurpose feeder. If it is visible, gently pull the jammed sheet out.
If the sheet is not visible, complete the following steps:
1
Open the front door, and then remove the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.
2
Lift the flap at the front of the printer, and then remove any jams.
3
Reinsert the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.
4
Close the front door.
5
Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
249
290–294 paper jams
Clearing jams under the ADF cover
1
Remove all original documents from the ADF.
2
Open the ADF cover.
3
Unlock the separator roll.
4
Remove the separator roll.
Clearing jams
250
5
Remove the jammed paper.
6
Reinstall the separator roll.
7
Lock the separator roll.
Clearing jams
251
8
Close the ADF cover.
9
Touch Continue.
Clearing ADF jams by lifting the scanner cover
1
Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.
2
Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
252
Clearing ADF duplex jams
If you are making a two-sided copy in the ADF, and your original document jams, it may be necessary to perform the following steps to clear the jam:
1
Remove the ADF input tray.
2
Pull out the jammed paper by pulling the sheet on the bottom.
3
Reinstall the ADF input tray.
4
Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
253
Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
•
The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
•
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
•
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
•
Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
•
The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
•
The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
•
All options are properly installed.
•
The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
If Ready does not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.
Understanding printer messages
Change <input src> to <Custom Type Name>
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
•
Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
•
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
•
Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
•
Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting
254
Change <input src> to <Custom String>
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
•
Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
•
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
•
Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
•
Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Change <input src> to <size>
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
•
Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
•
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
•
Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
•
Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Change <input src> to <type> <size>
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
•
Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
•
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
•
Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
•
Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Check tray <x> connection
Try one or more of the following:
•
Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3
Remove the tray.
4
Reattach the tray.
Troubleshooting
255
5
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
6
Restart the printer.
If the error occurs again:
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3
Remove the tray.
4
Contact Customer Support.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the tray.
Close door or insert cartridge
The cartridge is missing or not installed correctly. Insert the cartridge and close all doors and covers.
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard disk must be reformatted.
Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear the message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
The printer is not detecting an analog phone line, so the fax is disabled. Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted.
Fax memory full
There is not enough memory to send the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting
256
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Some held jobs are not restored. They stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored
Since the time the jobs were stored on the printer hard disk something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:
•
The printer firmware has been updated.
•
Paper input, output, or duplex options needed for the print job were removed.
•
The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the port.
•
The printer hard disk contains jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Load <input src> with <Custom Type Name>
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified paper in the tray.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting
257
Load <input src> with <Custom String>
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified paper in the tray.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Load <input src> with <size>
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified paper in the tray.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Load <input src> with <type> <size>
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified paper in the tray.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom Type Name>
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom String>
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting
258
Load Manual Feeder with <size>
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with <type> <size>
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
•
Cancel the current job.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
Restore Held Jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
•
Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.
Unsupported USB device, please remove
Remove the unrecognized USB device.
Unsupported USB hub, please remove
Remove the unrecognized USB hub.
Unsupported disk
An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed. Remove the unsupported device, and then install a supported one.
30.yy Invalid refill, change cartridge
An unsupported, refilled toner cartridge is installed. Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a new one.
Troubleshooting
259
31.yy Replace defective or missing cartridge
The toner cartridge is either missing or not functioning properly.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Remove the toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
•
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a new one.
32.yy Cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.
34 Short paper
Try one or more of the following:
•
Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray.
•
Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
•
Check the Print Properties or Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size and type.
•
Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
•
Cancel the current print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
•
To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
•
Install additional memory.
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
•
Cancel the current print job.
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting
260
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message.
•
Cancel the current print job.
•
Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•
Cancel the current print job.
•
Install additional printer memory.
Fax failed
The fax failed to be sent. Wait for the message to clear.
50 PPDS font error
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•
The printer cannot find a requested font. From the PPDS menu, select Best Fit, and then select On. The printer will find a similar font and reformat the affected text.
•
Cancel the current print job.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•
Cancel the current print job.
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
•
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
•
Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Troubleshooting
261
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to continue printing.
•
Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
•
Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
54 Network <x> software error
<x> is the number of the network connection.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to continue printing.
•
Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
•
Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
55 Unsupported option in slot <x>
<x> is a slot on the printer system board.
Try one or more of the following:
1
Turn the printer power off.
2
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3
Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board.
4
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5
Turn the printer power back on.
56 Parallel port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the parallel port.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
•
Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the serial port.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
•
Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
Troubleshooting
262
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•
Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 USB port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the USB port.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•
Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
58 Too many flash options installed
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3
Remove the excess flash memory.
4
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5
Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many trays attached
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3
Remove the additional trays.
4
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5
Turn the printer back on.
59 Incompatible tray <x>
Try one or more of the following:
•
Remove the specified tray.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.
Troubleshooting
263
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•
Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
•
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•
Install a larger printer hard disk.
63 Unformatted disk
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•
Format the printer hard disk.
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.
80 Routine maintenance needed
The printer needs to have routine maintenance done. Order a maintenance kit, which contains all the items necessary to replace the pick rollers, the charge roll, the transfer roller, and the fuser.
84 PC Kit life warning
The photoconductor kit is near exhaustion.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Replace the photoconductor kit.
•
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
84 Replace PC Kit
The photoconductor kit is exhausted. Install a new photoconductor kit.
88 Cartridge low
The toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card.
Troubleshooting
264
Scanner ADF Cover Open
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.
Scan Document Too Long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared. Replace the original documents in the scanner to restart the scan job.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears. This cancels the job and clears the message.
•
Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
•
Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
•
Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail, or FTP.
•
Touch Restart job if job recovery is active. The message clears. A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts.
Paper Change: Load Tray<x> <paper type>
The printer is set to print on a paper type that is different from what is loaded in Tray 1. Load Tray 1 with the correct paper type, or change the paper type settings in the Machine Settings menu or Print Properties to match what is loaded in Tray 1.
290-295.yy scanner jam
Clear all original documents from the scanner.
293 Replace all originals if restarting job.
The scanner was instructed to scan using the ADF but there is no paper in the ADF. Load paper in the ADF.
Try one or more of the following:
•
Touch Continue if no scan job is active when the attendance message appears. This clears the message.
•
Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the attendance message appears. This cancels the job and clears the message.
•
Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
•
Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the flatbed immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
Troubleshooting
265
•
Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail, or FTP.
•
Touch Restart job if job recovery is active and you are able to restart the job. The message clears. A new scan job containing the same parameters as the previous job starts.
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open
Close the scanner cover.
294 ADF Jam
This jam location may also be identified as 294.04 Duplex Sensor Off Jam, 294.05 Scan Sensor Off
Jam, or 294.06 ADF Backfeed Jam. To clear this jam:
1
Remove all pages from the ADF.
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.
2
Flex and fan the pages.
3
Place the pages in the ADF.
4
Adjust the ADF guides.
5
From the printer control panel, press .
840.01 Scanner Disabled
This message indicates that the scanner was disabled by the system support person, or the scanner detected a hardware error and disabled itself.
840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled
The printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it.
1
Remove all pages from the ADF.
2
Turn the printer off.
3
Wait 15 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Note: If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message, then contact your system support person.
4
Place the document in the ADF, and then adjust the paper guides.
5
On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
6
Change the copy settings as needed.
7
Touch Copy It.
Troubleshooting
266
Solving printing problems
Multiple-language PDFs do not print
The documents contain unavailable fonts.
1
Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2
Click the printer icon.
The Print dialog appears.
3
Select Print as image.
4
Click OK.
Jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready or Power Saver appears on the display before sending a job to print.
C
HECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
C
HECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
M
AKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
•
Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
•
If you are using a USB port, make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible printer software.
M
AKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING
•
Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
•
Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
M
AKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED PRINTER CABLE
M
AKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Troubleshooting
267
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
P
ARTIAL JOB
,
NO JOB
,
OR BLANK PAGES PRINT
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
•
Delete the print job, and then print it again.
•
For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
M
AKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Job takes longer than expected to print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
R
EDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.
C
HANGE THE
P
AGE
P
ROTECT SETTING TO
O
FF
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Settings.
4
Touch General Settings.
5
Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears.
6
Touch Print Recovery.
7
Touch the right arrow next to Page Protect until Off appears.
8
Touch Submit.
9
Touch .
Troubleshooting
268
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Incorrect characters print
M
AKE SURE THE PRINTER IS NOT IN
H
EX
T
RACE MODE
If Ready Hex appears on the display, then you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
L
OAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
•
Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
•
Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
U
SE THE SAME
P
APER
S
IZE AND
P
APER
T
YPE SETTINGS
•
Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
•
If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE
C
OLLATE IS SET TO
O
N
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
R
EDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.
Troubleshooting
269
M
AKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Unexpected page breaks occur
I
NCREASE THE
P
RINT
T
IMEOUT VALUE
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Settings.
4
Touch General Settings.
5
Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears.
6
Touch Timeouts.
7
Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears.
8
Touch Submit.
9
Touch .
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
C
HECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:
1
Lift the scanner unit.
2
Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3
Lower the scanner unit.
Troubleshooting
270
Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:
•
Blank pages
•
Checkerboard pattern
•
Distorted graphics or pictures
•
Missing characters
•
Faded print
•
Dark print
•
Skewed lines
•
Smudges
•
Streaks
•
Unexpected characters
•
White lines in print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
T
HE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. If your printer has an ADF, be sure to
T
HE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK
Adjust the copy darkness setting.
C
HECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
C
HECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
•
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
•
If you previously loaded your original document into the ADF, try loading it on the scanner glass.
U
NWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND
•
Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.
•
Change the Background Removal setting in the Copy Settings menu.
Troubleshooting
271
P
ATTERNS
(
MOIRÉ
)
APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT
•
From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo.
•
Rotate the original document on the scanner glass.
•
From the printer control panel, press the Scale button and adjust the setting.
T
EXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING
From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text or Text/Photo.
T
HE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED
•
From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo or Photo.
•
From the printer control panel, press the Darkness button and change to a darker setting.
T
HE PRINT IS SKEWED
Notes:
•
If you are loading your original document in the ADF, adjust the ADF paper guides so they touch the edges of the pages to be scanned.
•
Check the paper trays to make sure the guides touch the edges of the loaded paper.
Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
C
HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Troubleshooting
272
Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:
•
The printer is turned on.
•
The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
•
The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
•
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
•
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
•
Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem with the scanner.
Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
A
N ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
O
THER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.
T
HE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.
Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
Troubleshooting
273
T
HE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
A
DJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.
C
HECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
C
HECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
C
HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
C
HECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
C
HECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Troubleshooting
274
Solving fax problems
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
E
NABLE THE FAX FUNCTION
For more information, see “Initial fax setup” on page 124.
C
HECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
C
HECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
C
HECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:
•
Telephone
•
Handset
•
Answering machine
C
HECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1
Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2
Listen for a dial tone.
3
If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4
If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5
If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
Troubleshooting
275
R
EVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
•
If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
•
If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.
•
If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the
PBX. If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
C
HECK FOR A DIAL TONE
•
Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
•
If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.
•
If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.
T
EMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.
C
HECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.
T
EMPORARILY DISABLE
C
ALL
W
AITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.
V
OICE
M
AIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice
Mail and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
T
HE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1
Dial the fax number.
2
Scan the original document one page at a time.
Troubleshooting
276
Can send but not receive faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
C
HECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers. If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4.
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Fax Settings.
4
Click Analog Fax Setup.
5
In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.
6
Click Submit.
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
88 Cartridge low appears when the toner is low.
Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE PRINTER IS NOT IN
F
AX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.
T
HE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
M
AKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
•
Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
•
As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.
Troubleshooting
277
Received fax has poor print quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
R
E
-
SEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
•
Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
•
Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
•
Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge.
M
AKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2
Click Settings.
3
Click Fax Settings.
4
Click Analog Fax Setup.
5
In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
6
Click Submit.
Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
R
ESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Troubleshooting
278
C
HECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Unplug the printer.
3
Check the connection between the option and the printer.
M
AKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
M
AKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
Drawers
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1
Pull the tray completely out.
2
Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3
Make sure the guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4
Insert the tray.
R
ESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Hard disk with adapter
Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Troubleshooting
279
Internal Solutions Port
If the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) does not operate correctly, then these are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE
ISP
CONNECTIONS
•
Make sure the ISP is securely attached to the printer system board.
•
Make sure the cable is securely connected to the correct connector.
C
HECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
M
AKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information about installing software for network printing, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines.
M
AKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder.
C
HECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
T
HE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
•
Load paper from a fresh package.
•
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Troubleshooting
280
Paper trays
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1
Open the paper tray.
2
Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3
Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4
Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
R
ESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
M
AKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
C
HECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam
T
URN ON
J
AM
R
ECOVERY
In the Setup menu, Jam Recovery is set to Off. Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On:
1
Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2
On the home screen, touch .
3
Touch Settings.
4
Touch General Settings.
5
Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears.
6
Touch Print Recovery.
7
Touch the right arrow next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
8
Touch Submit.
9
Touch .
Troubleshooting
281
Solving print quality problems
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not correct the problem, contact Customer Support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.
Isolating print quality problems
To help isolate print quality problems, print the print quality test pages:
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Load Letter- or A4-size paper in the tray.
3
Hold down and while turning the printer on.
4
Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
5
Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears.
6
Touch Print Quality Pages.
The print quality test pages print.
7
Touch Back.
8
Touch Exit Configuration.
Blank pages
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
P
ACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Remove the toner cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the toner cartridge.
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge Low appears, order a new toner cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.
Troubleshooting
282
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PRINT QUALITY SETTINGS
•
Change the Print Resolution setting in the Quality menu to 600 dpi, 1200 Image Q, 1200 dpi, or 2400 Image Q.
•
Enable Enhance Fine Lines in the Quality menu.
M
AKE SURE DOWNLOADED FONTS ARE SUPPORTED
If you are using downloaded fonts, then verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the software program.
Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
C
HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Ghost images
Troubleshooting
283
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Gray background
C
HECK THE
T
ONER
D
ARKNESS SETTING
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:
•
From the printer control panel Quality menu, change the setting.
•
For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.
Incorrect margins
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
Troubleshooting
284
C
HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Paper curl
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
T
HE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
•
Load paper from a fresh package.
•
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Print irregularities
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
•
Load paper from a fresh package.
•
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Troubleshooting
285
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
C
HECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
T
HE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge Low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
T
HE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the fuser.
Skewed print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
C
HECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
Solid black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
E
NSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT
If the fill pattern is incorrect, choose a different fill pattern from your software program.
Troubleshooting
286
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE
•
Try a different type of paper.
•
Use only the recommended transparencies.
•
Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder.
•
Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or feeder.
E
NSURE THAT THE TONER IS DISTRIBUTED EVENLY WITHIN THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.
T
HE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER
Replace the used toner cartridge with a new one.
Print is too light
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DARKNESS
,
BRIGHTNESS
,
AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting is too light, the Brightness setting is too light, or the Contrast setting is too low.
•
Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
•
For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
T
HE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
•
Load paper from a fresh package.
•
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
C
HECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
Troubleshooting
287
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
T
HE TONER IS LOW
When 88 Cartridge Low appears, order a new toner cartridge.
T
HE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Print is too dark
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE DARKNESS
,
BRIGHTNESS
,
AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting is too dark, the Brightness setting is too dark, or the Contrast setting is too high.
•
Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
•
For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
T
HE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
•
Load paper from a fresh package.
•
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
C
HECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
Troubleshooting
288
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
T
HE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Solid color pages
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
M
AKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.
T
HE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER
Replace the used toner cartridge with a new one. If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced.
For more information, contact Customer Support.
Streaked vertical lines
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
Troubleshooting
289
T
HE TONER IS SMEARED
Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job:
•
From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select the Default Source.
•
For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
T
HE TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
T
HE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see.
T
HERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Streaked horizontal lines
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE TONER IS SMEARED
Select another tray or feeder to feed the paper for the job:
•
From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select the Default Source.
•
For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
T
HE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Troubleshooting
290
T
HE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see.
T
HERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
T
HE CHARGE ROLLS MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the charge rolls.
T
HERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Toner rubs off
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Troubleshooting
291
C
HECK THE
P
APER
T
EXTURE SETTING
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.
Toner specks
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
T
HE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
T
HERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1
From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2
Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Troubleshooting
292
Uneven print density
Example Cause
Toner cartridge is worn or defective.
Photoconductor is worn or defective.
Solution
Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the photoconductor.
Embedded Web Server does not open
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
C
HECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
C
HECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS
Depending on the network settings, you may need to type https:// instead of http:// before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, see your system administrator.
Contacting Technical Support
When you call Technical Support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and the Service Tag number or Express Service Code. For more information, see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer. The Service Tag number is also listed on the menu settings page.
For additional technical support, check the Dell Support Web site at support.dell.com.
Troubleshooting
293
Appendix
Dell Technical Support Policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the Operating System, application software and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Contacting Dell
You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information.
You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:
•
World Wide Web
www.dell.com/
www.dell.com/ap/ (Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp/ (Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
www.dell.com/la/ (Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca (Canada only)
•
Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your email address as your password.
•
Electronic Support Service
[email protected] (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
[email protected] (Asian/Pacific countries only)
support.jp.dell.com (Japan only)
support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
•
Electronic Quote Service
[email protected] (Asian/Pacific countries only)
[email protected] (Canada only)
Appendix
294
Warranty and Return Policy
Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the
Product Information Guide.
Appendix
295
Index
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load
293 Replace all originals if restarting
30.yy Invalid refill, change
31.yy Replace defective or missing
32.yy Cartridge part number
35 Insufficient memory to support
37 Insufficient memory to collate
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
37 Insufficient memory, some held
39 Complex page, some data may
51 Defective flash detected 261
52 Not enough free space in flash
54 Network <x> software error 262
54 Standard network software
55 Unsupported option in slot 262
550-sheet drawer
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 262
56 Serial port <x> disabled 262
56 Standard USB port disabled 263
57 Configuration change, held jobs
58 Too many flash options
58 Too many trays attached 263
80 Routine maintenance
840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled 266
Symbols
“scan to computer” screen
A
address book, fax
ADF
ADF separator rollers, cleaning 228
B
buttons, printer control panel 23
C
cables
canceling a job
from the printer control
card stock
Change <input src> to <Custom
Change <input src> to <Custom
Change <input src> to <size> 255
Index
296
Change <input src> to <type>
checking an unresponsive
checking an unresponsive
checking device status
cleaning
exterior of the printer 227 scanner glass 227
Close door or insert cartridge 256
color documents
printing from Macintosh
configuration information
configurations
configuring
configuring the e-mail
connecting the printer to
conservation settings
contacting Technical Support 293
copy quality
copy screen
copy troubleshooting
partial document or photo
poor scanned image quality 273
scanner unit does not close 270
copying adding a date and time
stamp 112 adding an overlay message 112
document containing mixed
multiple pages on one sheet 110
on both sides of the paper
pausing a print job to make
placing separator sheets between
using the scanner glass
custom paper type
Custom Type <x>
D
date and time
display troubleshooting
display shows only
display, printer control panel 23
distinctive ring service
documents, printing
from Macintosh 95 from Windows 95
duplexing
E
envelopes
environmental settings
Ethernet networking
exterior of the printer
notice of low supply level 238 notice of paper jam 238 notice of paper needed 238
notice that different paper is
e-mail function
e-mail screen
e-mailing
adding message line 120 adding subject line 120
changing output file type 121 color documents 121
configuring the e-mail
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the touch
setting up e-mail function 118
F
factory defaults, restoring
printer control panel menus 239
fax card
fax connection connecting the printer to the wall
jack 126 connecting to a DSL line 126
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 127
fax connections
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
fax screen
Index
297
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 257
fax troubleshooting
can receive but not send
can send but not receive
cannot send or receive a fax 275
received fax has poor print
faxing
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the touch
holding faxes 145 improving fax quality 145
making a fax lighter or
printing on both sides
sending a fax at a scheduled
sending using the computer 137
sending using the printer control
turning daylight saving time on or
using shortcuts 140 using the address book 140
fiber optic
finding
information 17 publications 17
firmware card
flash memory card
font sample list
FTP
FTP screen
G
green settings
guidelines
letterhead 96 transparencies 96
H
hard disk with adapter
printing from Macintosh
home screen
I
installation
installing
installing printer software
Internal Solutions Port
Index
298
Internal Solutions Port, network
J
jams
jams, clearing
L
labels, paper
letterhead
light
Load <input src> with <Custom
Load <input src> with <Custom
Load <input src> with <size> 258
Load <input src> with <type>
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom
Load Manual Feeder with <Custom
Load Manual Feeder with
Load Manual Feeder with <type>
loading
M
Macintosh
wireless network installation 59
memory card
Memory full, cannot print
menu settings page
menus
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 192
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 201
multiple pages on one sheet 110
multipurpose feeder
N
No analog phone line connected to
noise
O
options
fax card 29, 47 firmware card 29, 34
Internal Solutions Port 29, 36 memory card 29, 32 networking 29 ports 29 printer hard disk 29, 43
options, touch-screen
ordering supplies printer attached to a
printer locally attached to a
output file type
P
paper
loading, multipurpose feeder 80
setting size 75 setting type 75
paper capacities
paper capacity
Paper Change: Load Tray<x>
paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is
paper jams
paper jams, clearing
paper sizes
paper type
paper types
duplex support 91 supported by printer 91 where to load 91
Index
299
pausing the current print job
photoconductor kit
photos
port settings
Power Saver
print job
canceling from Macintosh 102 canceling from Windows 102
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 227
print quality test pages,
print quality troubleshooting
characters have jagged
edges 283 clipped images 283 ghost images 283
skewed print 286 solid black streaks 286
toner fog or background
shading 291 toner rubs off 291
print troubleshooting
incorrect characters print 269
jammed page does not
job prints from wrong tray 269 job prints on wrong paper 269
job takes longer than
multiple-language PDFs do not
tray linking does not work 269
unexpected page breaks
printer
factory defaults, restoring 239
printer hard disk
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load
293 Replace all originals if
30.yy Invalid refill, change
31.yy Replace defective or missing
32.yy Cartridge part number
35 Insufficient memory to support
37 Insufficient memory to collate
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
37 Insufficient memory, some held
39 Complex page, some data may
51 Defective flash detected 261
52 Not enough free space in flash
54 Network <x> software
54 Standard network software
55 Unsupported option in
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 262
56 Serial port <x> disabled 262
56 Standard USB port
57 Configuration change, held
58 Too many flash options
58 Too many trays attached 263
80 Routine maintenance
840.02 Scanner Auto
Change <input src> to <Custom
Change <input src> to <Custom
Change <input src> to
Change <input src> to <type>
Close door or insert cartridge 256
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
Load <input src> with <Custom
Index
300
Load <input src> with <Custom
Load <input src> with <size> 258
Load <input src> with <type>
Load Manual Feeder with
Load Manual Feeder with
Load Manual Feeder with
Load Manual Feeder with <type>
Memory full, cannot print
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 256
Paper Change: Load Tray<x>
Remove paper from standard
Replace all originals if restarting
SMTP server not set up. Contact
Some held jobs were not
Unsupported USB device, please
Unsupported USB hub, please
printer options troubleshooting
drawers 279 flash memory card 279 hard disk with adapter 279
printer problems, solving
printing
directory list 101 font sample list 101
from Macintosh 95 from Windows 95
installing printer software 53
printing confidential and other held jobs
Q
R
recycled paper
recycling
registration
Remove paper from standard
printing from Macintosh
Replace all originals if restarting
replacing
reports
printing from Macintosh
resolution, fax
S
Scan Profile options 153, 154, 155
scan to a computer
Index
301
scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a
partial document or photo
scanner unit does not close 270
scanning takes too long or freezes
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder
scanner glass
scanner glass (flatbed)
scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the touch
serial printing
setting
setting up
setting up the printer on a wired network
on a wired network
shortcuts, creating
SMTP server not set up. Contact
software
Driver Profiler 93 printer alert utility 93
Some held jobs were not
standard exit bin
status of supplies, checking 230
steps
storing
subject and message information
supplies
system board
T
tips
toner cartridge
touch screen
transparencies
tray linking 86 tray unlinking 86
trays
troubleshooting checking an unresponsive
checking an unresponsive
contacting Technical
solving basic printer
troubleshooting, copy
partial document or photo
poor scanned image quality 273
scanner unit does not close 270
troubleshooting, display
display shows only
troubleshooting, fax
can receive but not send
can send but not receive
cannot send or receive a fax 275
received fax has poor print
troubleshooting, paper feed message remains after jam is
troubleshooting, print
incorrect characters print 269
jammed page does not
job prints from wrong tray 269 job prints on wrong paper 269
job takes longer than
multiple-language PDFs do not
Index
302
tray linking does not work 269
unexpected page breaks
troubleshooting, print quality
characters have jagged
edges 283 clipped images 283 ghost images 283
skewed print 286 solid black streaks 286
toner fog or background
shading 291 toner rubs off 291
troubleshooting, printer options
drawers 279 flash memory card 279 hard disk with adapter 279
troubleshooting, scan cannot scan from a
partial document or photo
scanner unit does not close 270
scanning takes too long or freezes
U
Universal Paper Size
Unsupported USB device, please
Unsupported USB hub, please
V
printing from Macintosh
viewing
W
Web site
Windows
wireless network installation 56
wired network setup
wired networking
wireless network
installation, using Macintosh 59
installation, using Windows 56
X
Index
303
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Key Features
- Business Laser Mono printing
- 1200 x 1200 DPI
- Printing colours: Black
- A4 38 ppm
- Mono copying Colour scanning Mono faxing
- USB port Ethernet LAN
- Internal memory: 128 MB 500 MHz
- 22.7 kg
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 2 Contents
- 15 Safety information
- 17 Learning about the printer
- 17 Thank you for choosing this printer!
- 17 Finding information about the printer
- 18 Printer configurations
- 20 Selecting a location for the printer
- 21 Basic functions of the scanner
- 22 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
- 23 Understanding the printer control panel
- 24 Understanding the home screen
- 25 Using the touch-screen buttons
- 29 Additional printer setup
- 29 Installing internal options
- 29 Available internal options
- 30 Accessing the system board to install internal options
- 32 Installing a memory card
- 34 Installing a flash memory or firmware card
- 36 Installing an Internal Solutions Port
- 43 Installing a printer hard disk
- 47 Installing a fax card
- 50 Installing hardware options
- 50 Installing a 550-sheet drawer
- 51 Attaching cables
- 52 Verifying printer setup
- 52 Printing a menu settings page
- 53 Printing a network setup page
- 53 Setting up the printer software
- 53 Installing printer software
- 54 Updating available options in the printer driver
- 55 Setting up wireless printing
- 55 Follow these steps to set up your printer
- 55 Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network
- 56 Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
- 59 Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
- 62 Installing the printer on a wired network
- 65 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
- 67 Setting up serial printing
- 69 Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
- 69 Saving paper and toner
- 69 Using recycled paper and other office papers
- 69 Conserving supplies
- 70 Saving energy
- 70 Using Eco-Mode
- 71 Adjusting Power Saver
- 72 Adjusting the brightness of the display
- 72 Setting the standard exit bin light
- 73 Reducing printer noise
- 75 Loading paper and specialty media
- 75 Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type
- 75 Configuring Universal paper settings
- 76 Avoiding jams
- 76 Loading trays
- 80 Using the multipurpose feeder
- 85 Linking and unlinking trays
- 85 Linking trays
- 85 Unlinking trays
- 86 Assigning a custom paper type name
- 86 Changing a Custom Type <x> name
- 87 Paper and specialty media guidelines
- 87 Paper guidelines
- 87 Paper characteristics
- 88 Unacceptable paper
- 88 Selecting paper
- 88 Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
- 89 Storing paper
- 89 Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
- 89 Paper sizes supported by the printer
- 91 Paper types and weights supported by the printer
- 91 Paper capacities
- 93 Software overview
- 93 Status Monitor Center
- 93 Driver Profiler
- 93 Dell Printer Alert Utility
- 95 Printing
- 95 Printing a document
- 95 Printing on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
- 96 Printing on specialty media
- 96 Tips on using letterhead
- 96 Tips on using transparencies
- 96 Tips on using envelopes
- 97 Tips on using labels
- 97 Tips on using card stock
- 98 Printing confidential and other held jobs
- 98 Holding jobs in the printer
- 98 Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows
- 99 Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer
- 100 Printing from a flash drive
- 101 Printing information pages
- 101 Printing a font sample list
- 101 Printing a directory list
- 101 Printing the print quality test pages
- 102 Canceling a print job
- 102 Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
- 102 Canceling a print job from the computer
- 104 Copying
- 104 Making copies
- 104 Making a quick copy
- 104 Copying using the ADF
- 105 Copying using the scanner glass
- 105 Copying photos
- 105 Copying on specialty media
- 105 Making transparencies
- 106 Copying to letterhead
- 106 Customizing copy settings
- 106 Copying from one size to another
- 107 Making copies using paper from a selected tray
- 107 Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
- 107 Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes
- 108 Reducing or enlarging copies
- 109 Adjusting copy quality
- 109 Collating copies
- 110 Placing separator sheets between copies
- 110 Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
- 111 Creating a custom job (job build)
- 111 Pausing the current print job to make copies
- 112 Placing information on copies
- 112 Placing the date and time at the top of each page
- 112 Placing an overlay message on each page
- 113 Canceling a copy job
- 113 Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
- 113 Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
- 113 Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed
- 113 Understanding the copy screens and options
- 113 Copy from
- 113 Copy to
- 114 Scale
- 114 Darkness
- 114 Content
- 114 Sides (Duplex)
- 114 Collate
- 114 Options
- 116 Improving copy quality
- 117 E-mailing
- 117 Getting ready to e-mail
- 117 Enabling the e-mail function
- 118 Setting up the e-mail function
- 118 Configuring the e-mail settings
- 118 Creating an e-mail shortcut
- 118 Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
- 119 Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
- 119 E-mailing a document
- 119 Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
- 119 Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number
- 120 Sending an e-mail using the address book
- 120 Customizing e-mail settings
- 120 Adding e-mail subject and message information
- 121 Changing the output file type
- 121 E-mailing color documents
- 121 Canceling an e-mail
- 122 Understanding e-mail options
- 122 Original Size
- 122 Sides (Duplex)
- 122 Orientation
- 122 Binding
- 122 E-mail Subject
- 122 E-mail File Name
- 122 E-mail Message
- 122 Resolution
- 123 Send As
- 123 Content
- 123 Advanced Options
- 124 Faxing
- 124 Getting the printer ready to fax
- 124 Initial fax setup
- 125 Choosing a fax connection
- 126 Connecting to an analog telephone line
- 126 Connecting to a DSL service
- 127 Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
- 127 Connecting to a distinctive ring service
- 128 Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line
- 130 Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
- 134 Connecting to a computer with a modem
- 135 Enabling the fax function
- 136 Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
- 136 Setting the date and time
- 136 Turning daylight saving time on or off
- 137 Sending a fax
- 137 Sending a fax using the printer control panel
- 137 Sending a fax using the computer
- 138 Creating shortcuts
- 138 Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
- 139 Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
- 139 Changing the fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
- 140 Using shortcuts and the address book
- 140 Using fax shortcuts
- 140 Using the address book
- 141 Customizing fax settings
- 141 Changing the fax resolution
- 141 Making a fax lighter or darker
- 141 Sending a fax at a scheduled time
- 142 Printing an incoming fax on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
- 142 Viewing a fax log
- 142 Blocking junk faxes
- 143 Canceling an outgoing fax
- 143 Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
- 143 Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
- 143 Understanding fax options
- 143 Original Size
- 144 Content
- 144 Sides (Duplex)
- 144 Resolution
- 144 Darkness
- 144 Advanced Options
- 145 Improving fax quality
- 145 Holding and forwarding faxes
- 145 Holding faxes
- 146 Forwarding a fax
- 147 Scanning to an FTP address
- 147 Scanning to an FTP address
- 147 Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad
- 147 Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
- 148 Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
- 148 Creating shortcuts
- 148 Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
- 148 Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
- 149 Understanding FTP options
- 149 Original Size
- 149 Sides (Duplex)
- 149 Orientation
- 149 Binding
- 149 Resolution
- 150 Send As
- 150 Content
- 150 Advanced Options
- 151 Improving FTP quality
- 152 Scanning to a computer or flash drive
- 152 Scanning to a computer
- 153 Scanning to a flash drive
- 153 Understanding scan profile options
- 153 Quick Setup
- 153 Format Type
- 154 Compression
- 154 Default Content
- 154 Color
- 154 Original Size
- 154 Orientation
- 154 Sides (Duplex)
- 154 JPEG Quality
- 154 Darkness
- 155 Resolution
- 155 Advanced Imaging
- 155 Improving scan quality
- 156 Understanding printer menus
- 156 Menus list
- 157 Paper menu
- 157 Default Source menu
- 157 Paper Size/Type menu
- 157 Configure MP menu
- 157 Substitute Size menu
- 158 Paper Texture menu
- 159 Paper Weight menu
- 161 Paper Loading menu
- 162 Custom Types menu
- 162 Custom Names menu
- 162 Custom Scan Sizes menu
- 163 Universal Setup menu
- 163 Reports menu
- 165 Network/Ports menu
- 165 Active NIC menu
- 165 Standard Network or Network <x> menus
- 166 Reports menu (under the Network/Ports menu)
- 167 Network Card menu
- 167 TCP/IP menu
- 169 IPv6 menu
- 169 Wireless menu
- 170 AppleTalk menu
- 170 NetWare menu
- 171 Standard USB menu
- 172 Parallel menu
- 174 Serial <x> menu
- 177 SMTP Setup menu
- 178 Security menu
- 178 Miscellaneous menu
- 178 Confidential Print menu
- 179 Security Audit Log menu
- 179 Set Date/Time menu
- 180 Settings menu
- 180 General Settings menu
- 186 Copy Settings menu
- 192 Fax Settings menu
- 202 E-mail Settings menu
- 207 FTP Settings menu
- 210 Flash Drive menu
- 215 Print Settings
- 226 Help menu
- 227 Maintaining the printer
- 227 Cleaning the exterior of the printer
- 227 Cleaning the scanner glass
- 228 Cleaning the ADF separator rollers
- 229 Adjusting scanner registration
- 230 Storing supplies
- 230 Checking the status of supplies
- 230 Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel
- 230 Checking the status of supplies from a network computer
- 231 Ordering supplies
- 231 Printer attached to a network
- 231 Printer attached locally to a computer
- 231 Replacing supplies
- 231 Replacing the toner cartridge
- 233 Replacing the photoconductor kit
- 236 Recycling Dell products
- 236 Moving the printer to another location
- 237 Shipping the printer
- 238 Administrative support
- 238 Using the Embedded Web Server
- 238 Checking the device status
- 238 Setting up e-mail alerts
- 239 Viewing reports
- 239 Restoring the factory default settings
- 240 Clearing jams
- 240 Understanding jam messages and locations
- 241 200 and 201 paper jams
- 243 202 paper jam
- 244 231 paper jam
- 246 233 paper jam
- 246 234 paper jam
- 247 235 paper jam
- 247 240–249 paper jams
- 248 250 paper jam
- 249 251 paper jam
- 250 290–294 paper jams
- 254 Troubleshooting
- 254 Solving basic printer problems
- 254 Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
- 254 Understanding printer messages
- 254 Change <input src> to <Custom Type Name>
- 255 Change <input src> to <Custom String>
- 255 Change <input src> to <size>
- 255 Change <input src> to <type> <size>
- 255 Check tray <x> connection
- 256 Close door or insert cartridge
- 256 Close front door
- 256 Disk corrupted
- 256 SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
- 256 No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
- 256 Memory full, cannot print faxes
- 256 Fax memory full
- 257 Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
- 257 Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
- 257 Some held jobs were not restored
- 257 37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
- 257 57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored
- 257 Load <input src> with <Custom Type Name>
- 258 Load <input src> with <Custom String>
- 258 Load <input src> with <size>
- 258 Load <input src> with <type> <size>
- 258 Load Manual Feeder with <Custom Type Name>
- 258 Load Manual Feeder with <Custom String>
- 259 Load Manual Feeder with <size>
- 259 Load Manual Feeder with <type> <size>
- 259 Remove paper from standard output bin
- 259 Restore Held Jobs?
- 259 Unsupported USB device, please remove
- 259 Unsupported USB hub, please remove
- 259 Unsupported disk
- 259 30.yy Invalid refill, change cartridge
- 260 31.yy Replace defective or missing cartridge
- 260 32.yy Cartridge part number unsupported by device
- 260 34 Short paper
- 260 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
- 260 37 Insufficient memory to collate job
- 260 37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
- 261 38 Memory full
- 261 39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
- 261 Fax failed
- 261 50 PPDS font error
- 261 51 Defective flash detected
- 261 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
- 262 54 Standard network software error
- 262 54 Network <x> software error
- 262 55 Unsupported option in slot <x>
- 262 56 Parallel port <x> disabled
- 262 56 Serial port <x> disabled
- 263 56 Standard USB port disabled
- 263 56 USB port <x> disabled
- 263 58 Too many flash options installed
- 263 58 Too many trays attached
- 263 59 Incompatible tray <x>
- 264 61 Remove defective disk
- 264 62 Disk full
- 264 63 Unformatted disk
- 264 80 Routine maintenance needed
- 264 84 PC Kit life warning
- 264 84 Replace PC Kit
- 264 88 Cartridge low
- 264 1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
- 265 Scanner ADF Cover Open
- 265 Scan Document Too Long
- 265 Replace all originals if restarting job.
- 265 Paper Change: Load Tray<x> <paper type>
- 265 290-295.yy scanner jam
- 265 293 Replace all originals if restarting job.
- 266 293.02 Flatbed Cover Open
- 266 294 ADF Jam
- 266 840.01 Scanner Disabled
- 266 840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled
- 267 Solving printing problems
- 267 Multiple-language PDFs do not print
- 267 Jobs do not print
- 268 Confidential and other held jobs do not print
- 268 Job takes longer than expected to print
- 269 Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
- 269 Incorrect characters print
- 269 Tray linking does not work
- 269 Large jobs do not collate
- 270 Unexpected page breaks occur
- 270 Solving copy problems
- 270 Copier does not respond
- 270 Scanner unit does not close
- 271 Poor copy quality
- 272 Partial document or photo copies
- 273 Solving scanner problems
- 273 Checking an unresponsive scanner
- 273 Scan was not successful
- 273 Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
- 273 Poor scanned image quality
- 274 Partial document or photo scans
- 274 Cannot scan from a computer
- 275 Solving fax problems
- 275 Caller ID is not shown
- 275 Cannot send or receive a fax
- 277 Can send but not receive faxes
- 277 Can receive but not send faxes
- 278 Received fax has poor print quality
- 278 Solving option problems
- 278 Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
- 279 Drawers
- 279 Memory card
- 279 Flash memory card
- 279 Hard disk with adapter
- 280 Internal Solutions Port
- 280 Solving paper feed problems
- 280 Paper frequently jams
- 281 Paper trays
- 281 Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
- 281 Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam
- 282 Solving print quality problems
- 282 Isolating print quality problems
- 282 Blank pages
- 283 Characters have jagged or uneven edges
- 283 Clipped images
- 283 Ghost images
- 284 Gray background
- 284 Incorrect margins
- 285 Paper curl
- 285 Print irregularities
- 286 Skewed print
- 286 Solid black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper
- 287 Print is too light
- 288 Print is too dark
- 289 Solid color pages
- 289 Streaked vertical lines
- 290 Streaked horizontal lines
- 291 Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
- 291 Toner rubs off
- 292 Toner specks
- 292 Transparency print quality is poor
- 293 Uneven print density
- 293 Embedded Web Server does not open
- 293 Check the network connections
- 293 Check the network settings
- 293 Contacting Technical Support
- 294 Appendix
- 294 Dell Technical Support Policy
- 294 Contacting Dell
- 295 Warranty and Return Policy
- 296 Index